Zebra Managed Configurations

OEMConfig 13.1

Terms in this Guide

Type Styling

  • Bold Italic type indicates values of a Managed Configuration such as On or Enable.

  • Bold type indicates the name of an MC, Group, Sub-group, or Sub-array, such as the System Configuration Group, the Keyboard Configuration Sub-group, the Packages Sub-array, or the State Managed Configuration.

  • Italic type is used for emphasis and for referencing Defined Terms, such as Sub-group and Instance. Defined terms are Capitalized to differentiate them from italics used solely for emphasis.

Android Terms

  • Android Package

An Android Package is how executable code is packaged for execution on Android devices. Android Packages can be built-into the Operating System image (OS), in which case they are referred to as being built-in, pre-loaded, or pre-installed. Android Packages that are not built-in can be added to an Android device by downloading and installing them, in which case they are referred to as post-loaded, post-installed, or installable. Each Android Package is identified by a unique Android Package Name and can contain one or more Android Activities and/or Android Services.

Android defines a series of standard behaviors that will generally be exhibited by Android Packages which may vary based on whether an Android Package is pre-loaded or post-loaded and based on whether the Android Package is Trusted or Non-Trusted. Most Android Packages will fall into one of the following basic types:

  • Built-in System Application

A Built-in System Package is pre-loaded as part of the OS and is granted special System Permissions on the device. This makes it a Trusted Package and allows it to interact with system services and use System APIs that are not available to Non-Trusted Packages. Zebra carefully controls and vets all such Android Packages before building them into the OS to ensure that they are safe and contribute beneficially to the overall device experience without creating performance, security, or usability issues.

  • Built-in Non-System Package

A Built-in Non-System Package is pre-loaded as part of the OS but is not granted any special System Permissions on the device. This makes it a Non-Trusted Package and allows it to interact with system services and to use System APIs that are not available to Non-Trusted Packages. Zebra carefully controls and vets all such Android Packages* before building them into the OS to ensure that they contribute beneficially to the overall device experience without creating performance or usability issues.

  • Installable System Package

An Installable System Package must be post-loaded, since it is not part of the OS but is granted special System Permissions on the device. This makes it a Trusted Package and allows it to interact with system services and to useSystem APIs that are not available to Non-Trusted Packages. Only Zebra can provide such Android Packages* and Zebra carefully controls and vets all such Android Packages* it provides before they are published to ensure that they are safe and contribute beneficially to the overall device experience without creating performance, security, or usability issues. Ultimately, the decision of whether to install such an Android Package* on a device is the responsibility of the Device Administrator.

  • Installable Non-System Package

An Installable Non-System Package must be post-loaded, since it is not part of the OS and is not granted any special System Permissions on the device. This makes it anNon-Trusted Package and prevents it from interacting with system services and from using System APIs that are not available to Non-Trusted Packages. Zebra carefully controls and vets all such Android Packages* before they are published to ensure that they contribute beneficially to the overall device experience without creating performance or usability issues. Zebra cannot and does not control or guarantee the suitability of such Android Packages* that it does not provide. Ultimately, evaluating such an Android Package* and deciding whether to install it on a device is the responsibility of the Device Administrator.

  • Android Package Name

An Android Package Name is a string that uniquely identifies one or more versions of an Android Package.

  • Android Application

An Android Application refers to an Android Package that contains at least one Android Activity and therefore has some in-device UI for interacting with the User to differentiate it from other Android Packages that may only have Android Services and therefore have no UI for interacting with the User.

  • Android Status Bar

The Android Status Bar is an area at the top edge of the screen on an Android device where various status information can be displayed to the User.

  • Android Notification Bar

The Android Notification Bar is an area at the bottom edge of the screen on an Android device where soft buttons are provided to allow the User to navigate within the UI of the device.

Managed Configuration Terms

  • MC

See Managed Configuration.

  • Managed Configuration

A Managed Configuration is a single configurable item, defined within the OEMConfig Schema, that can be used, alone or in conjunction with other MCs, to change some aspect of device behavior.

  • Schema

See Managed Configuration Schema.

  • Managed Configuration Schema

A Managed Configuration Schema is a definition of all the of the Managed Configuration that are supported by a given application.

  • Group

See Managed Configuration Group.

  • Managed Configuration Group

A Managed Configuration Group is a collection of Sub-groups or Sub-arrays that are defined to control multiple related aspects of device behavior (such as System Configuration or UI Configuration). A Group can include no more than one instance of any Sub-group or Sub-array that is defined for that Group.

  • Sub-group

A Sub-group is a collection of MCs, Sub-groups, or Sub-arrays that can be used to control some sub-aspect of device behavior (such as the Clock Configuration Sub-group within the System Configuration Group). A Sub-group can include no more than one instance of any MC, Sub-group, or Sub-array defined for that Sub-group.

  • Sub-array

A Sub-array is an ordered list of instances of a SINGLE Sub-group, each of which can contain anything that is defined for that Sub-group. The only time the same MC, Sub-group, or Sub-array can be included more than once into the same Sub-group is when it appears within different Instances of that Sub-group within a Sub-array.

OEMConfig Terms

  • OEMConfig

OEMConfig is a term invented by Zebra and adopted by Google to refer to an OEM-specific application that exposes Managed Configurations which it uses to enable configuration of OEM-specific features of the device rather than to configure application features.

  • Zebra OEMConfig

Zebra OEMConfig is a term used by Zebra to refer to Zebra-specific OEMConfig application(s) provided by Zebra to configure Zebra Android devices.

  • Zebra OEMConfig Schema

Zebra OEMConfig Schema is a term used to refer to a Schema for a Zebra OEMConfig application.

  • Zebra OEMConfig Old Schema

Zebra OEMConfig Old Schema is a term used to refer to the Zebra OEMConfig Schema defined for the old version of the Zebra OEMConfig application with package name "com.zebra.oemconfig.common" and intended for use on Zebra Android devices with Android 11 or lower.

  • Zebra OEMConfig New Schema

Zebra OEMConfig New Schema is a term used to refer to the Zebra OEMConfig Schema defined for the new version of the Zebra OEMConfig application with package name "com.zebra.mdna.oemconfig" and intended for use on Zebra Android devices with Android 11 or higher.

Zebra OEMConfig Terms

  • Setting

A Setting is a Managed Configuration defined in a Zebra OEMConfig Schema that is used to enable configuration of some aspect of device behavior. A Setting generally affects the ongoing behavior of a device from the time it is applied until some subsequent time when it is changed to a new value. The order of configuration of different Settings is generally expected to have little or no impact on the end result. Further, it is generally is expected to be safe to set a Setting to the same value repetitively with no negative impact. Common examples of Settings include display timeout and network configuration.

  • Action

An Action is a Managed Configuration defined in a Zebra OEMConfig Schema that is used to enable performance on a device of some operation that takes place during some unit of time, that has a beginning, a middle, and an end, and then is over. An Action MAY, but doesn’t always, cause a change in the device state that affects ongoing behavior of a device. An Action MAY be REPEATED, but should NEVER be AUTOMATICALLY repeated and should be repeated ONLY when EXPLICITLY requested by an administrator. When an Action is repeated, the corresponding operation will occur again and that MIGHT produce negative or undesirable behavior if done unintentionally or unexpectedly. In many cases, the ORDER in which multiple different Actions are performed can be quite important since it can affect the actual outcome. Common examples of Actions include performing a reboot, uninstalling an application, or wiping an SD card. The Zebra OEMConfig Old Schema heavily relied on Actions, but Google has since discouraged the use of Actions in OEMConfig applications because it can be difficult or even impossible to reliably enforce ordering and prevent repetition. For this reason, the Zebra OEMConfig New Schema eliminated all support for Actions.

  • Argument

An Argument is a parameter specified for an Action that defines or adjusts the operation performed by that Action. Most Actions have at least one Argument and some Actions have multiple Arguments. Each invocation of an Action may have different Arguments to suit the reason why the Action is being performed.

  • Condition

A Condition is a criteria defining when an Action should be performed. Actions are generally invoked when an administrator determines that the .Conditions are appropriate to require the operation defined by that Action and its Arguments to be performed.

  • Rule

A Rule is a Setting defined in a Zebra OEMConfig Schema that is used to configure a device to perform some defined operation at some time in the future when certain defined Conditions are met. Every Rule must specify information that defines an operation to be performed AND information that defines the Conditions when that operation should be performed. In many cases, an Action can be converted into one or more Rules to help conform to the Google recommendation that OEMConfig applications should ONLY support Settings and NOT Actions. Because a Rule is a Setting, it doesn't cause the operation to be performed when it is configured, but instead sets the operation up to be performed in the future. As a result, it is generally unnecessary to worry about the order in which Rules are configured or about preventing the repetition of the configuration of Rules. Common examples of Rules include configuring a device to automatically download a file when it is not already on a device or configuring a device to update its OS when it is out of date. The Zebra OEMConfig New Schema heavily relies on Rules to replace functionality that was previously supported in the the Zebra OEMConfig Old Schema via Actions.

  • Array of Rules

An Array of Rules is a mechanism that uses an Array of Rules to replace an Action. Most Actions require Arguments to define variations in the operation to be performed and each invocation of an Action could have a different combination of Arguments. To provide a similar capability, an Array of Rules can be created where each element of the Array contains a different set of Arguments and thus defines a slightly different operation to be performed. Since each element of the Array is a Rule, each element of the Array must also include information that describes the Conditions when the defined operation should be performed. By creating an Array of Rules that contains elements that define the required combination of Arguments and Conditions, comparable results can be achieved without using Actions.

Additional Terms

The above terms have been defined here because they may be generally used throughout this document. Additional terms will be defined in subsequent sections of this document as needed to clarify concepts and usage specific to those sections.


Application Configuration

Use this Group to configure Device Central Configuration .

Detail Information:

  • Key = appConfig

  • Type = bundle

Device Central Configuration

   Application Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Bluetooth Pairing Control, User Control of Bluetooth State, User Control of Firmware Update, and Smart Leash.

Detail Information:

  • Key = deviceCentralConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Bluetooth Pairing Control

   Application Configuration  >  Device Central Configuration

Select whether Device Central system should allow multiple pairings to the same Device Class.

  • If the value Single Pairing Per Device Class is selected, Device Central system will only allow one pairing at a time for each Bluetooth Device Class (e.g. one headset and one printer).
  • If the value Multiple Pairings Per Device Class is selected, Device Central system will allow multiple pairings at a time for each Bluetooth Device Class (e.g. multiple headsets and/or multiple printers).

Detail Information:

  • Key = appDeviceCentralBluetoothPairingControl

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Single Pairing Per Device Class  1 
 Multiple Pairings Per Device Class  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

User Control of Bluetooth State

   Application Configuration  >  Device Central Configuration

Select whether the User will be allowed to use the Device Central UI to control the Bluetooth State.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be allowed to use the Device Central UI to control the Bluetooth State.

  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be allowed to use the Device Central UI to control the Bluetooth State.

Detail Information:

  • Key = appDeviceCentralBluetoothOnOffControl

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

User Control of Firmware Update

   Application Configuration  >  Device Central Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to use the Firmware Update Button within the Device Central UI to perform Firmware Updates.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to use the Firmware Update Button within the Device Central UI to perform Firmware Updates.
  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to use the Firmware Update Button within the Device Central UI to perform Firmware Updates.

Detail Information:

  • Key = appDeviceCentralFirmwareUpdateButton

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

Smart Leash

   Application Configuration  >  Device Central Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure State, User Access To Smart Leash Section, Audio Feedback, and Haptic Feedback.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dcSmartLeash

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

State

   Application Configuration  >  Device Central Configuration  >  Smart Leash

Select whether the Smart Leash active (on) or inactive (off).

  • If the value Off is selected, Device Central will turn on Smart Leash.
  • If the value On is selected, Device Central will turn off Smart Leash.

Detail Information:

  • Key = slState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

User Access To Smart Leash Section

   Application Configuration  >  Device Central Configuration  >  Smart Leash

Select whether the User will be Allowed to use the Device Central UI to configure Smart Leash.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to use the Device Central UI to configure Smart Leash.
  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to use the Device Central UI to configure Smart Leash.

Detail Information:

  • Key = slSettingsUI

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Audio Feedback

   Application Configuration  >  Device Central Configuration  >  Smart Leash

Use this Sub-group to configure State, Sound, Volume, and Repeat Count.

Detail Information:

  • Key = slAudioFeedback

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

State

   Application Configuration  >  Device Central Configuration  >  Smart Leash  >  Audio Feedback

Select whether the Smart Leash Audio Feedback is active (on) or inactive (off).

  • If the value Off is selected, Device Central will turn on Audio Feedback in Smart Leash.
  • If the value On is selected, Device Central will turn off Audio Feedback in Smart Leash.

Detail Information:

  • Key = slafState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Sound

   Application Configuration  >  Device Central Configuration  >  Smart Leash  >  Audio Feedback

Enter the sound to be used when the Smart Leash Audio Feedback is active (on). The name of an existing Ringtone or the fully qualified path to an audio file is expected. .wav, .ogg, .mp3 and .m4a audio file types are supported.

Detail Information:

  • Key = slafSound

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Volume

   Application Configuration  >  Device Central Configuration  >  Smart Leash  >  Audio Feedback

Enter the percentage of volume that should be used when State is set to On. Supported values range between 1 and 100.

Detail Information:

  • Key = slafVolume

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Repeat Count

   Application Configuration  >  Device Central Configuration  >  Smart Leash  >  Audio Feedback

Enter the number of times the sound should be repeated when State is set to On. Supported values range between 0 and 100.

Detail Information:

  • Key = slafRepeatCount

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Haptic Feedback

   Application Configuration  >  Device Central Configuration  >  Smart Leash

Use this Sub-group to configure State and Time.

Detail Information:

  • Key = slHapticFeedback

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

State

   Application Configuration  >  Device Central Configuration  >  Smart Leash  >  Haptic Feedback

Select whether the Smart Leash Haptic Feedback is active (on) or inactive (off).

  • If the value Off is selected, Device Central will turn on Audio Feedback in Smart Leash.
  • If the value On is selected, Device Central will turn off Audio Feedback in Smart Leash.

Detail Information:

  • Key = slhfState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Time

   Application Configuration  >  Device Central Configuration  >  Smart Leash  >  Haptic Feedback

Enter the duration of vibration when the State is set to On

Detail Information:

  • Key = slhfDuration

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Files Configuration

Use this Array to configure one or more special handlings for one or more File(s).

Files are a fundamental unit of storage in Android, via which data is organized and stored within the storage areas of an Android device. The following terms can help explain how Files are used in Android:

Device File System

Device File System is generically used to refer to any storage area in an Android device in which data, organized as Files, can reside. This term can refer to Files that are built into the device, but it is most commonly used to refer to Files that are stored in storage areas on the device that can be read and modified during normal device operation, by the Android system and/or by Android Applications.

Folder

Folder refers to a location in the Device File System where Files can exist and that can be used to hierarchically organize Files into groups.

Media Storage

Media Storage is a collection of Folders in Android that is generically used to refer to any storage area in the Device File System in which common types of media data, organized as Files, can reside. This term is most commonly used to refer to Folders where media Files (such as pictures, video, audio, etc.) can be stored and shared by multiple applications.

Application Sandbox

Application Sandbox is a Folder in the Device File System that is associated with an Android Application into which application data, organized as Files, can be placed such that they are private to and accessible only by that Android Application. This term can apply to private Files stored in Primary Storage, Secondary Storage, or Portable Storage. The key criteria that applies to all Application Sandbox data, and that differentiates it from other data, is the fact that it is owned by and generally accessible only to the Android Package that created it.

Shared Folders

Shared Folders refer to Folders in the Device File System of an Android device in which data, organized as Files, can reside and be shared amongst multiple Android Packages. Android generally discourages the use of Shared Folders and has added more and more restrictions over time to limit their use. In particular, Scoped Storage is a recent addition to Android designed to severely restrict the use of Shared Folders to share data between Android Packages. Android provides other mechanisms, such as Intents, Content and File Providers, and the Storage Access Framework to enable sharing of data amongst Android Packages to be done in a more secure and controlled manner than could ever be achieved using Shared Folders. For the time being, many Zebra Android devices support the use of the following Shared Folders, but these are expected to be phased out over time to better comply with Android standard practice.

  • /data/tmp/public

The folder /data/tmp/public is unique to Zebra Android devices and is commonly used for downloading Transient Files, such as Local Update Files for OS Updates.

  • /enterprise/usr

The folder /enterprise/usr is unique to Zebra Android devices, is generally of a relatively small fixed size (e.g. 128MB), and is commonly used for downloading Persistent Files, such as Android Packages that might need to be re-installed following an Enterprise Reset.

Most Files stored in the Device File System do NOT require any special handling. Most Files are created, read, updated, and deleted by the Android system and/or by Android Applications on a device without any outside intervention. But some Files MAY require special handling, in which case this Array is used to identify which Files require special handling and what special handling each such File requires. There is generally no reason to include a file in this Array unless it needs some form of special handling, but a single File could have multiple types of special handling. Every element of this Array should specify a value for Device Path And Name that uniquely identifies a File by the path and file name where the File resides in the in the Device File System.

The following classes of special handling might be required:

  • Download File

Download File special handling would be appropriate when there was a File that was created off-device that needed to be delivered to the device to support some system or application service that needed to consume that File. For example, a Local Update File used to initiate an OS Update would generally originate off-device and might need to be Downloaded to a Shared Folder before it could be used to initiate such an OS Update. A special case of Download File special handling is when the File to be downloaded is intended for the exclusive use of a single Android Application.

  • Upload File

Upload File special handling would be appropriate when there was a File that was created by the Android system and/or by Android Applications on a device that needed to be Uploaded to somewhere off-device for its eventual consumption there. For example, a Log File might be uploaded to a server so it could be used for troubleshooting or analysis.

  • Delete File

Delete File special handling would be appropriate when there was a need for a File to be Deleted (removed from the Device File System) for some reason NOT driven by the Android system and/or by Android Applications. For example, a File might be created by an Android Application that neglects to delete it, resulting in a large amount of space being occupied. Deleting such a File , under the right conditions, could be quite beneficial.

Special handling must be carefully defined to avoid the potential for repetition which could cause harm or negatively impact device performance. For example, repeatedly downloading the same File could have multiple negative effects, such as slowing down the device, clogging up the network, wearing out flash memory, etc.

This Array is used to specify which Files require special handling. Any File that does NOT require special handling should not have an element in this Array, indicating that NO special handling should be performed. Any File that DOES require special handling should not have an element in this Array that specifies ALL special handlings required for that File.

  • If this Array has never been specified (never included in the MCs sent), then no configuration of special handling will be configured for any Files.

  • If this Array is not specified (not included in the MCs sent), then no changes will be made to the configuration defined by any previously specified version of this Array.

  • If this Array is specified (included in the MCs sent), then the specified Array will entirely replace the configuration defined by any previously specified Array.

Note that it is generally NOT possible to specify an "empty" Array (i.e. an Array with zero elements). Every Array must contain at least one element. Any element(s) in this Array where a blank (empty string) value is entered for Device Path And Name will be ignored. It is therefore possible to specify a "virtually empty" Array by entering a blank (empty string) value for Device Path And Name in every element of the Array.

  • If this Array is specified (included in the MCs sent), but that Array is "virtually empty," as described above, then all special handling previously configured by any previously specified Array will be removed, thus returning to a state equivalent to when no Array had ever been specified.

Detail Information:

  • Key = filesConfig

  • Type = bundle_array

File

   Files Configuration

Use this Sub-group to identify a File that needs special handling and to specify the special handling it needs.

  • To specify that a File should be downloaded, at least one Download Option Type must be specified via Download Options.

  • To specify that a File should be uploaded, at least one Upload Option Type must be specified via Upload Options.

  • To specify that a File should be deleted, at least one Delete Option Type must be specified via Delete Options.

Notes:

  • If none of Download Options, Upload Options, or Delete Options are specified for a File, then NO special handlings CAN occur for that File.

  • If one or more Download Options, Upload Options, or Delete Options are specified for a File, then one or more special handlings MAY occur for that File, if/when one or more of the conditions specified for that File via Download Option Type , Upload Option Type, or Delete Option Type are met for that File.

Detail Information:

  • Key = filesConfigFile

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Device Path And Name

   Files Configuration  >  File

Enter a string that uniquely identifies a File in the Device File System for which special handling is required.

For each element in the Array Files Configuration:

  • If no value is specified for this MC or if a blank (empty string) value is entered, then the element of the Array will be ignored (not processed), producing the same result as if the element of the Array was not present. This can be used to effectively remove an element of an Array or to create a virtually empty Array.

  • If a non-blank (non-empty string) value is entered, then the element of the Array will be processed and the value entered must uniquely identify a File that DOES or COULD exist in the Device File System.

  • The value entered could take the format /<path>/<filename> to indicate that the File is to be downloaded to a Shared Folder in the Device File System.

  • The value entered could take the format /<path>/<filename>, where <filename> includes one or more of the wildcard characters * (Asterisk) or ? (Question mark) to indicate that all *Files in the specified path that match are to be uploaded to a Server from a Shared Folder in the Device File System.

  • The value entered could take the format <packagename>/<path>/<filename> to indicate that the File should be downloaded using the Zebra Secure Storage Manager for the exclusive use of the Android Application identified by the specified Android Package Name. In such cases, Download Application Signature must also be specified to provide the Android Package Signature that will be verified to ensure that the instance of the Android Application to which the File will be deployed is genuine.

Detail Information:

  • Key = filesConfigDevicePathAndName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Download Options

   Files Configuration  >  File

Use this Sub-array to configure when/how a File should be downloaded from a Server to the Device File System.

Detail Information:

  • Key = filesConfigDownloadOptions

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 5.0.

Download Option

   Files Configuration  >  File  >  Download Options

Use this Sub-group to configure when/how a File should be downloaded from a Server to the Device File System.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fileMgmtDownloadOption

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Download Option Type

   Files Configuration  >  File  >  Download Options  >  Download Option

Select the Type of a single Download Option defining when/how to download a File From a Server to the Device File System.

  • If the value On Server is selected, a File will be downloaded from a Server if the file is present on the Server whether or not the File is currently present in the Device File System.

  • If the value On Server but not on Device is selected, a File will be downloaded from a Server, only if the file is present on the Server AND the File is NOT currently present in the Device File System.

If a File is downloaded, it will be downloaded from the location on the Server specified via Download Server URI to the Device File System at the location specified via Device Path And Name.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fileMgmtDownloadOptionType

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 On Server  1 
 On Server but not on Device  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Download Server URI

   Files Configuration  >  File

Enter a URI that identifies a File on a Server that will be downloaded to the Device File System when indicated by one or more Download Options.

Detail Information:

  • Key = filesConfigDownloadServerUri

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Download Application Signature

   Files Configuration  >  File

Enter the Android Package Signature to be used to verify that the Android Application for which the File will be downloaded is genuine. This is meaningful ONLY when the format <packagename>/<path>/<filename> is used for Device Path And Name to indicate that the File should be downloaded using the Zebra Secure Storage Manager for the exclusive use of the Android Application.

Detail Information:

  • Key = filesConfigDestSignature

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.3.

Download File Persistence

   Files Configuration  >  File

Select whether the File downloaded to the Device File System should locally persist on the device following an Enterprise Reset. This is meaningful ONLY when the format <packagename>/<path>/<filename> is used for Device Path And Name to indicate that the File should be downloaded using the Zebra Secure Storage Manager for the exclusive use of the Android Application.

Detail Information:

  • Key = filesConfigDeployPersistence

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do Not Persist  0 
 Persist  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.3.

Upload Options

   Files Configuration  >  File

Use this Sub-array to configure when/how Files should be uploaded to a Server from the Device File System.

It is important to understand that due to the one-to-many relationship between Enterprise Mobility Management Systems (EMMs) and devices, the nature of upload is fundamentally different from download. When downloading a File from a Server to the Device File System, a single File on a Server can be downloaded to the same location in the Device File System of many devices. But when a File in the Device File System of many devices is uploaded to the Server, it doesn't make sense for each upload to overwrite a single file on the Server. In order for upload to make sense, each copy of a File uploaded by a different device needs to be uploaded to the Server with a different name, to ensure that all uploaded Files will be retained. Further, to make the set of uploaded copies of a File useful, it is important that the different copies of a File uploaded by different devices be somehow associated to the device from which they were uploaded.

Unlike download, which always downloads a single File from the Server to the Device File System on any given device, upload COULD upload multiple Files to the Server from the Device File System of a given device. This is accomplished by using the /<path>/<filename> format for Device Path And Name where <filename> includes one or more of the wildcard characters * (Asterisk) or ? (Question mark). All *Files that match will be uploaded.

Unlike download, which can download the same File from the Server to the Device File System of many devices, upload may need to upload copies of the same File from many devices to the same Server and must therefore name the Files from different devices differently on the Server. This is accomplished by specifying only a location via Upload Server URI not a specific File AND by specifying a pattern via Upload File Name Pattern telling upload how to name Files from different devices when they are uploaded to a common location on the Server.

Detail Information:

  • Key = filesConfigUploadOptions

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.1.

Upload Option

   Files Configuration  >  File  >  Upload Options

Use this Sub-group to configure when/how Files should be to uploaded to a Server from the Device File System.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fileMgmtUploadOption

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Upload Option Type

   Files Configuration  >  File  >  Upload Options  >  Upload Option

Select the Type of a single Upload Option defining when/how to upload matching Files to a Server from the Device File System.

  • If the value Not on Server is selected, a matching File will be uploaded to a Server if the File is present in the Device File System and is NOT present on the Server.

  • If the value Sorted By Name is selected, if multiple matching Files exist to be uploaded to a Server, they will be uploaded in alphabetical order by filename instead of uploading them in the default order of oldest to newest.

If a File is uploaded, it will be uploaded from the Device File System at the location specified via Device Path And Name to the location specified via Download Server URI with a name determined from the value specified via Upload File Name Pattern.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fileMgmtUploadOptionType

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Not on Server  1 
 Sorted By Name  3 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Upload File Name Pattern

   Files Configuration  >  File

Enter a Pattern to be used to craft the names of Files uploaded to a Server to ensure that Files uploaded from different devices have different names. The Pattern may contain any characters that are valid for use in a File Name on the Server, which may vary by Server but will generally include letters, digits, and a decimal point (dot) and may also contain one or more of the following:

  • If the constant value %model% appears in the Pattern, then it will be replaced with the model name of the device.
  • If the constant value %serial% appears in the Pattern, then it will be replaced with the serial number of the device.
  • If the constant value %date% appears in the Pattern, then it will be replaced with the date the File was created in the Device File System.
  • If the constant value %time% appears in the Pattern, then it will be replaced with the time the File was created in the Device File System.

For example, if the Pattern was Log-%model%-%serial%-%date%-%time%.zip, a File that is Uploaded to the Server might be assigned the File Name Log-TC51-123456789-041520-112300.zip, indicating that the File was a Log File that was Created on a TC51 device whose serial number was 123456789 and where the File was created in the Device File System at 11:23 AM on April 15, 2020.

Detail Information:

  • Key = filesConfigUploadFileNamePattern

  • Type = string

Upload Server URI

   Files Configuration  >  File

Enter the URI of a location on a Server to which File(s) from the Device File System will be uploaded.

Note: Because multiple Files may be uploaded from a given device, and because Files may be uploaded from multiple devices, this URI should point to a Folder on the Server NOT to a File on the Server. The name of the Files uploaded to the specified location on the Server will be determined based on the value specified via Upload File Name Pattern.

Detail Information:

  • Key = filesConfigUploadServerURI

  • Type = string

Delete Options

   Files Configuration  >  File

Use this Sub-array to configure when a File should be deleted the Device File System.

Detail Information:

  • Key = filesConfigDeleteOptions

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 5.0.

Delete Option

   Files Configuration  >  File  >  Delete Options

Use this Sub-group to configure when a File should be deleted from the Device File System.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fileMgmtDeleteOption

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Delete Option Type

   Files Configuration  >  File  >  Delete Options  >  Delete Option

Select the Type of a single Delete Option defining when to delete a File from the Device File System.

  • If the value Always is selected, a File will be deleted from the Device File System whenever it exists.

  • If the value After Reboot(s) is selected, a File will be deleted from the Device File System only if it exists immediately after a reboot.

If a File is deleted, it will be deleted from the location in the Device File System specified via Device Path And Name.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fileMgmtDeleteOptionType

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Always  1 
 After Reboot(s)  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Keyboard Mappings

Use this Array to configure one or more Keyboard Mapping(s)

The following defined terms are important to understand:

Key

Key refers to any physical switch that can be activated through manual pressure or any logical (e.g. On-Screen) button that can be activated using a touch panel or other pointing device.

Keyboard

Keyboard refers to any input mechanism that utilizes Keys that can be pressed to enter data into a mobile device.

Built-In Keyboard

Built-In Keyboard refers to a Keyboard that is physically integrated with and is generally inseparable from a mobile device and where Keys are generally activated by manual pressure.

On-Screen Keyboard

On-Screen Keyboard refers to a Keyboard that is displayed on the screen and where Keys are generally activated by a touch panel or other pointing device. In Android devices, On-Screen Keyboards are typically implemented through the Soft Input Panel (SIP) mechanism.

External Keyboard

External Keyboard refers to a Keyboard that is physically separate from a mobile device and that must be connected to the mobile device via some communications channel, such as Bluetooth or USB, and where Keys are generally activated by manual pressure.

Key Behavior

Key Behavior refers to what will occur when a Key on a Keyboard is activated. Key Behavior for a Key may vary depending on the current Keyboard State of a Keyboard when the Key is activated on that Keyboard.

Keyboard Mapping

Keyboard Mapping refers to configuration that alters the operation of a Keyboard by changing The Key Behavior for one or more Keys on that Keyboard.

Keyboard State

Keyboard State refers to a logical state that a Keyboard can be in and which affects the Key Behavior of Keys that are pressed while in that state. Standard Keyboard States include Shift, Caps Lock, Control, and Alt. Built-In Keyboards on Zebra Android devices may also support non-standard Keyboard States, such as Function, Blue, Orange, etc.

Mapping Table

Mapping Table refers to a table maintained in memory on a Zebra Android device that holds the Keyboard Mappings defined for a Keyboard that apply to a particular Keyboard State. For example, the Shift Mapping Table for a Keyboard would contain Keyboard Mappings that apply to Keys pressed only when that Keyboard is in the Shift Keyboard State. Consult the product documentation for a Zebra Android device to determine which Mapping Tables it supports.

Key Identifier

Key Identifier refers to a value used to uniquely identify a Key on a Keyboard so the Key Behavior of that Key can be altered via a Keyboard Mapping for that Key. Key Identifiers are most commonly string values that match the label of a Key, for keys that are labelled. For example, the Key Identifier "A" would used to identify a Key that is labelled as having that function. In some cases, a Key may be labeled with a graphical symbol that cannot easily be represented through a direct text string. For example, the "Left Arrow" Key may be labeled with a graphical arrow symbol, in which the Key Identifier will attempt to describe that symbol (e.g. "Left"). In some cases, a Key may be unlabeled, in which case the Key Identifier will attempt to describe the Key using functional and/or positional information. For example, the "Volume Up" Key is unlabeled and will describe the function of the Key (e.g. "Volume Up") and the yellow "Scan" trigger Key on the left hand side of the device might be unlabeled and will describe the function and position of the Key (e.g. "Left Trigger").

Key Code

Key Code refers to a value that is sent to the Android System when a key is activated to indicate how the key should be interpreted.

Trigger Signal

Trigger Signal refers to a logical indication, on a Zebra Android device, that a Key has been activated that is configured to behave as a trigger. Various Zebra Value-Add services, such as Barcode Scanning, are designed to respond to Trigger Signals.

This Array allows Keyboard Mappings to be defined for Built-In Keyboards only.

Each element of this Array:

  • Defines a Keyboard Mapping for a single Key on the Built-In Keyboard, identified by the Key Identifier value specified in Key ID. By adding multiple elements to this Array, Keyboard Mappings for multiple Keys can be defined.

  • Can define the behavior of the identified Key in one or more Mapping Tables that are supported by the Built-In Keyboard on a Zebra Android device. .

Detail Information:

  • Key = keyboardMappings

  • Type = bundle_array

Keyboard Mapping

   Keyboard Mappings

Use this Sub-group to configure Key ID and Behaviors for a single Key on the Built-In Keyboard.

  • Key ID must be specified to provide the Key Identifier of the Key whose Key Behaviors will be altered in one or more Keyboard States.

  • The Sub-array Behaviors must be specified to define the Key Behavior to be defined as the Keyboard Mapping for the Key identified by the Key Identifier. .

Detail Information:

  • Key = keyboardMapping

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 4.4.

Key ID

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping

Select the Key Identifier value that uniquely identifies the Key on the Built-In Keyboard" whose *Key Behavior is to be changed in one or more Keyboard States.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingKeyId

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 0  0 
 1  1 
 2  2 
 3  3 
 4  4 
 5  5 
 6  6 
 7  7 
 8  8 
 9  9 
 A  A 
 B  B 
 C  C 
 D  D 
 E  E 
 F  F 
 G  G 
 H  H 
 I  I 
 J  J 
 K  K 
 L  L 
 M  M 
 N  N 
 O  O 
 P  P 
 Q  Q 
 R  R 
 S  S 
 T  T 
 U  U 
 V  V 
 W  W 
 X  X 
 Y  Y 
 Z  Z 
 . (Period)  DOT 
 , (Comma)  COMMA 
 * (Star)  STAR 
 # (Pound)  POUND 
 F1  F1 
 F2  F2 
 F3  F3 
 F4  F4 
 F5  F5 
 F6  F6 
 F7  F7 
 F8  F8 
 F9  F9 
 F10  F10 
 F11  F11 
 F12  F12 
 Enter  ENTER 
 Up  UP 
 Down  DOWN 
 Left  LEFT 
 Right  RIGHT 
 NAV_OK  NAV_OK 
 Escape  ESC 
 Backspace  BACKSPACE 
 Space  SPACE 
 Return  RETURN 
 Clear  CLR 
 Field Exit  FIELD_EXIT 
 Alt  ALT 
 Control  CTRL 
 Shift  SHIFT 
 Func  FUNC 
 Alpha  ALPHA 
 CL  CL 
 FN  FN 
 Blue  BLUE 
 Orange  ORANGE 
 Grey  GREY 
 Diamond  DIAMOND 
 Green Dot  GREEN 
 Red Dot  RED 
 Volume Up  VOLUMEUP 
 Volume Down  VOLUMEDOWN 
 Scan  SCAN 
 Grip Trigger  GRIP_TRIGGER 
 Grip Trigger 2  GRIP_TRIGGER_2 
 Button L1  LEFT_TRIGGER_1 
 Button L2  LEFT_TRIGGER_2 
 Button R1  RIGHT_TRIGGER_1 
 Button R2  RIGHT_TRIGGER_2 
 Left Trigger  LEFT_TRIGGER 
 Right Trigger  RIGHT_TRIGGER 
 Center Trigger  CENTER_TRIGGER 
 Gun Trigger  GUN_TRIGGER 
 Headset Button  HEADSET_HOOK 
 Back  BACK 
 Home  HOME 
 Menu  MENU 
 Recent  RECENT 
 Search  SEARCH 
 Keyboard Backlight  KEYLIGHT 
 Display Backlight  LAMP 
 Power  POWER 
 P1 Button  P1 
 P2 Button  P2 
 P3 Button  P3 
 P4 Button  P4 
 P5 Button  P5 
 P6 Button  P6 
 W1 Button  W1 
 W2 Button  W2 
 Rear Button  REAR_BUTTON 
 Left External Trigger  LEFT_EXTERNAL_TRIGGER 
 Right External Trigger  RIGHT_EXTERNAL_TRIGGER 
 Bluetooth Remote Trigger 1  BLUETOOTH_REMOTE_TRIGGER_1 
 Bluetooth Remote Trigger 2  BLUETOOTH_REMOTE_TRIGGER_2 
 Touch NAV_PAD  NAV_PAD 
 Macro 1  M1 
 Macro 2  M2 
 Macro 3  M3 
 Macro 4  M4 
 Macro 5  M5 
 Macro 6  M6 
 Brightness Up  BRIGHTNESSUP 
 Brightness Down  BRIGHTNESSDOWN 
 Keyboard  KEYBOARD 
 Keyboard Backlight Brightness Up  KEYLIGHTUP 
 Keyboard Backlight Brightness Down  KEYLIGHTDOWN 
 Rotate  ROTATE 
 + (Plus)  PLUS 
 - (Minus)  MINUS 
 Pause  PAUSE 
 End  END 
 Page Up  PAGEUP 
 Page Down  PAGEDOWN 
 Tab  TAB 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Behaviors

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Key Behaviors for a Key on the Built-In Keyboard.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviors

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Behavior

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors

Use this Sub-group to configure Table Name, Behavior Type, Send Key Code, Alt State, Ctrl State, Fn State, Shift State, Send Trigger, Send Intent, Intent Method, Intent Action, Intent Category, Intent Package Name, Intent Class, Intent Data URI, Intent MIME Type, Intent Extra Name 1, Intent Extra Name 2, Intent Extra Name 3, Intent Extra Name 4, Intent Extra Name 5, Intent Extra Value 1, Intent Extra Value 2, Intent Extra Value 3, Intent Extra Value 4, Intent Extra Value 5, Intent Flags, Send Intent - Intent Add Key Event, and Launch Application Name to define a single Key Behavior for a Key on the Built-In Keyboard.

  • Table Name must be specified to identify the Mapping Table into which the Key Behavior should be stored and which will thereby define the Keyboard State in which the Key must be activated in order for the Key Behavior to occur.

  • Behavior Type must be specified to identify the type of Key Behavior being defined .

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehavior

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Table Name

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Select the name of the Mapping Table into which the Key Behavior should be stored and which will thereby define the Keyboard State in which the Key must be activated in order for the Key Behavior to occur.

Each Mapping Table is associated with a Keyboard State and is generally named based on the state Key on the Built-in Keyboard that causes that Keyboard State to be set or cleared.

Note that due to variations in the size, layout, and intended use cases of Built-In Keyboards on various Zebra Android devices, not all Keyboard States may be supported on any given device. Consult the product documentation for a device to determine the supported Keyboard States and Mapping Tables.

Some or all of the following values may be supported by a Zebra Android device:

  • If the value Base is selected, the Base Mapping Table will be selected. The Base Mapping Table is used to store the Key Behaviors that will be performed for Keys that are activated under conditions where no Keyboard States are set.

  • If the value Blue is selected, the Blue Mapping Table will be selected. The Blue Mapping Table is used to store the Key Behaviors that will be performed for Keys that are activated under conditions where the Blue Key has been used to set the Blue Keyboard State.

  • If the value Orange is selected, the Orange Mapping Table will be selected. The Orange Mapping Table is used to store the Key Behaviors that will be performed for Keys that are activated under conditions where the Orange Key has been used to set the Orange Keyboard State.

  • If the value Grey is selected, the Grey Mapping Table will be selected. The Grey Mapping Table is used to store the Key Behaviors that will be performed for Keys that are activated under conditions where the Grey Key has been used to set the Grey Keyboard State.

  • If the value Diamond is selected, the Diamond Mapping Table will be selected. The Diamond Mapping Table is used to store the Key Behaviors that will be performed for Keys that are activated under conditions where the Diamond Key has been used to set the Diamond Keyboard State.

  • If the value Shift is selected, the Shift Mapping Table will be selected. The Shift Mapping Table is used to store the Key Behaviors that will be performed for Keys that are activated under conditions where the Shift Key has been used to set the Shift Keyboard State.

  • If the value Control is selected, the Control Mapping Table will be selected. The Control Mapping Table is used to store the Key Behaviors that will be performed for Keys that are activated under conditions where the Control Key has been used to set the Control Keyboard State.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTableName

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Base  Base 
 Blue  Blue 
 Orange  Orange 
 Grey  Grey 
 Diamond  Diamond 
 Shift  Shift 
 Control  Control 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Behavior Type

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Select the type of Key Behavior that will be performed when a specified Key is activated while the Keyboard State associated with the specified Mapping Table is set. The following values are supported:

  • If the value Send Key Code is selected, the Key Behavior performed when the specified Key is activated while the Keyboard State associated with the specified Mapping Table is set will be to send a specified Key Code. This can be thought of as being “Classic Keyboard Remapping”, since it causes the standard Key Behavior of a Key, which is generally to send a standard Key Code to be altered to send a different Key Code, which may or may not be present on the Built-In Keyboard and hence might otherwise not been possible to send without using Key Mapping. You must also specify Send Key Code to provide the Key Code that will be sent.

  • If the value Send Trigger is selected, the Key Behavior performed when the specified Key is activated while the Keyboard State associated with the specified Mapping Table is set will be to send a Trigger Signal. You must also specify Send Trigger to select which Trigger Signal will be sent,

  • If the value Launch Application is selected, the Key Behavior performed when the specified Key is activated while the Keyboard State associated with the specified Mapping Table is set will be to launch an application. You must also specify Launch Application Name to provide the Friendly Name of the application to be launched.

Note that this is NOT the Android Package Name. To launch an application by its Android Package Name, the value Send Intent should be select.

  • If the value Send Intent is selected, the Key Behavior performed when the specified Key is activated while the Keyboard State associated with the specified Mapping Table is set will be to send an Android Intent

    • Sending an Android Intent provides a very flexible way to specify the Key Behavior to be performed for a Key by invoking an application or service.

    • There are many options that control the nature of the intent that will be sent.

    • It is generally recommended to fully understand the nature of the Android Intent to be sent before attempting to configure it as a Key Key Behavior.

    • In many cases, the application or service to be invoked will define the nature of the intent it wishes to receive and that definition can be used to drive the configuration.

    • Android allows a collection of named Extras, of various types, to be attached to any intent.

    • An Intent sent as a Key Behavior for a specified Key can optionally have up to 5 Extras attached which, if used, MUST always be of type String.

    • This limitation of only attaching up to 5 Extras of type String might prevent certain intents, those which require more Extras or Extras of type other than String, from being sent as a Key Behavior for a Key.

    • You should consult the documentation or developer of a given application or service to determine the intents it supports and whether a function you want to perform requires any Extra(s) to be attached and, if so, of what type(s).

    • Sending an Android Intent might cause any number of possible results, depending on the nature of the intent configured to be sent.

    • You must also specify some or all of the following to define the Android Intent to be sent:

      • Intent Method

      • Intent Action

      • Intent Category

      • Intent Package Name

      • Intent Class

      • Intent Data URI

      • Intent Flags

      • Intent MIME Type

      • Intent Extra Name 1

      • Intent Extra Value 1

      • Intent Extra Name 2

      • Intent Extra Value 2

      • Intent Extra Name 3

      • Intent Extra Value 3

      • Intent Extra Name 4

      • Intent Extra Value 4

      • Intent Extra Name 5

      • Intent Extra Value 5

  • If the value Suppress Key is selected, NO Key Behavior will be performed when the specified Key is activated while the Keyboard State associated with the specified Mapping Table is active. This provides a method to change a Key to do nothing (act as if it was Key has not been activated). - If the value Reset To Default is selected, the Key Behavior performed when the specified Key is activated while the Keyboard State associated with the specified Mapping Table is active be reset back to its default. This will effectively remove any prior mapping of that Key in that Keyboard State and return the Key to its out-of-box Key Behavior in that Keyboard State.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorType

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Send Key Code  2 
 Send Trigger  1 
 Launch Application  4 
 Send Intent  3 
 Suppress Key  5 
 Reset To Default  7 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Send Key Code

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Select the Key Code that will be sent as the Key Behavior for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Key Code is selected for Behavior Type.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendKeyCode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 0  7 
 1  8 
 2  9 
 3  10 
 4  11 
 5  12 
 6  13 
 7  14 
 8  15 
 9  16 
 + (Plus)  81 
 - (Minus)  69 
 = (Equals)  70 
 ( (Left Bracket)  71 
 ) (Right Bracket)  72 
 ` (Grave)  68 
 / (Slash)  76 
 \\\\ (Backslash)  73 
 ; (Semicolon)  74 
 ' (Apostrophe)  75 
 , (Comma)  55 
 . (Period)  56 
 * (Star)  17 
 # (Pound)  18 
 @ (At)  77 
 A  29 
 B  30 
 C  31 
 D  32 
 E  33 
 F  34 
 G  35 
 H  36 
 I  37 
 J  38 
 K  39 
 L  40 
 M  41 
 N  42 
 O  43 
 P  44 
 Q  45 
 R  46 
 S  47 
 T  48 
 U  49 
 V  50 
 W  51 
 X  52 
 Y  53 
 Z  54 
 Enter  66 
 Tab  61 
 Space  62 
 Escape  111 
 Delete  67 
 F1  131 
 F2  132 
 F3  133 
 F4  134 
 F5  135 
 F6  136 
 F7  137 
 F8  138 
 F9  139 
 F10  140 
 F11  141 
 F12  142 
 NUMPAD 0  144 
 NUMPAD 1  145 
 NUMPAD 2  146 
 NUMPAD 3  147 
 NUMPAD 4  148 
 NUMPAD 5  149 
 NUMPAD 6  150 
 NUMPAD 7  151 
 NUMPAD 8  152 
 NUMPAD 9  153 
 NUMPAD / (NUMPAD Divide)  154 
 NUMPAD * (NUMPAD Multiply)  155 
 NUMPAD - (NUMPAD Subtract)  156 
 NUMPAD + (NUMPAD Add)  157 
 NUMPAD . (NUMPAD Period)  158 
 NUMPAD , (NUMPAD Comma)  159 
 NUMPAD Enter  160 
 NUMPAD = (NUMPAD Equals)  161 
 NUMPAD { (NUMPAD Left Parenthesis)  162 
 NUMPAD } (NUMPAD Right Parenthesis)  163 
 DPAD Up  19 
 DPAD Down  20 
 DPAD Left  21 
 DPAD Right  22 
 DPAD Center  23 
 Move Home  122 
 Move End  123 
 Page Up  92 
 Page Down  93 
 Insert  124 
 Forward Delete  112 
 Clear  28 
 Lamp  10024 
 Do Nothing  10026 
 Blue  10027 
 Orange  10028 
 Grey  10029 
 Diamond  10039 
 Alt  10030 
 Control  10031 
 Shift  10032 
 Keyboard  10034 
 Touch Calibrate  10035 
 Scan  10036 
 Search Key  10037 
 None  10038 
 KeyLight  10025 
 Keylight Up  10040 
 Keylight Down  10041 
 Left Shift  59 
 Right Shift  60 
 Left Alt  57 
 Right Alt  58 
 Left Control  113 
 Right Control  114 
 Meta Left  117 
 Meta Right  118 
 Caps Lock  115 
 Num Lock  143 
 Scroll Lock  116 
 SysRq  120 
 Break  121 
 Function  119 
 Back  4 
 Forward  125 
 Home  3 
 Menu  82 
 Settings  176 
 Application Switch  187 
 Calculator  210 
 Explorer  64 
 Envelope  65 
 Bookmark  174 
 Music  209 
 Call  5 
 End Call  6 
 Microphone Mute  91 
 Camera  27 
 Search  84 
 Contacts  207 
 Calendar  208 
 Volume Up  24 
 Volume Down  25 
 Volume Mute  164 
 Brightness Up  221 
 Brightness Down  220 
 Power  26 
 Sleep  223 
 Wakeup  224 
 Headset  79 
 Push-to-talk  228 
 Camera Focus  80 
 Media Play/Pause  85 
 Media Stop  86 
 Media Next  87 
 Media Previous  88 
 Media Rewind  89 
 Media Fast-Forward  90 
 Media Play  126 
 Media Pause  127 
 Media Close  128 
 Media Eject  129 
 Media Record  130 
 Button L1  102 
 Button R1  103 
 Button L2  104 
 Button R2  105 
 Button A  96 
 Button B  97 
 Button C  98 
 Button X  99 
 Button Y  100 
 Button Z  101 
 Left Thumb Button  106 
 Right Thumb Button  107 
 Start Button  108 
 Select Button  109 
 Mode Button  110 
 Gamepad Button 1  188 
 Gamepad Button 2  189 
 Gamepad Button 3  190 
 Gamepad Button 4  191 
 Gamepad Button 5  192 
 Gamepad Button 6  193 
 Gamepad Button 7  194 
 Gamepad Button 8  195 
 Gamepad Button 9  196 
 Gamepad Button 10  197 
 Gamepad Button 11  198 
 Gamepad Button 12  199 
 Gamepad Button 13  200 
 Gamepad Button 14  201 
 Gamepad Button 15  202 
 Gamepad Button 16  203 
 Zenkaku/Hankaku  211 
 Eisu  212 
 Muhenkan  213 
 Henkan  214 
 Katakana/Hiragana  215 
 Ro  217 
 Yen  216 
 Kana  218 
 Keyboard  10034 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Alt State

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Select whether the Key Code specified via Send Key Code will be sent with the Alt Keyboard State set when it is sent as the Key Behavior.

  • If the value Off is selected, then when the Key Code is sent, it will NOT be sent with the Alt Keyboard State set. This will ensure that it will NOT interpreted as a Alt Key.
  • If the value On is selected, then when the Key Code is sent, it WILL be sent with the Alt Keyboard State set. This will ensure that it WILL be interpreted as a Alt Key.
  • If no value is specified, then when the Key Code is sent, it will be sent without modifying the Alt Keyboard State. This will ensure that it will be interpreted as a Alt or non-Alt Key depending on whatever Keyboard State the Keyboard is currently in.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendKeyCodeAltState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 On  1 
 Off  0 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Ctrl State

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Select whether the Key Code specified via Send Key Code will be sent with the Control Keyboard State set when it is sent as the Key Behavior.

  • If the value Off is selected, then when the Key Code is sent, it will NOT be sent with the Control Keyboard State set. This will ensure that it will NOT interpreted as a Control Key.
  • If the value On is selected, then when the Key Code is sent, it WILL be sent with the Control Keyboard State set. This will ensure that it WILL be interpreted as a Control Key.
  • If no value is specified, then when the Key Code is sent, it will be sent without modifying the Control Keyboard State. This will ensure that it will be interpreted as a Control or non-Control Key depending on whatever Keyboard State the Keyboard is currently in.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendKeyCodeCtrlState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 On  1 
 Off  0 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Fn State

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Select whether the Key Code specified via Send Key Code will be sent with the Function Keyboard State set when it is sent as the Key Behavior.

  • If the value Off is selected, then when the Key Code is sent, it will NOT be sent with the Function Keyboard State set. This will ensure that it will NOT interpreted as a Function Key.
  • If the value On is selected, then when the Key Code is sent, it WILL be sent with the Function Keyboard State set. This will ensure that it WILL be interpreted as a Function Key.
  • If no value is specified, then when the Key Code is sent, it will be sent without modifying the Function Keyboard State. This will ensure that it will be interpreted as a Function or non-Function Key depending on whatever Keyboard State the Keyboard is currently in.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendKeyCodeFnState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 On  1 
 Off  0 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Shift State

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Select whether the Key Code specified via Send Key Code will be sent with the Shift Keyboard State set when it is sent as the Key Behavior.

  • If the value Off is selected, then when the Key Code is sent, it will NOT be sent with the Shift Keyboard State set. This will ensure that it will NOT interpreted as a Shifted Key.
  • If the value On is selected, then when the Key Code is sent, it WILL be sent with the Shift Keyboard State* set. This will ensure that it WILL be interpreted as a Shifted Key.
  • If no value is specified, then when the Key Code is sent, it will be sent without modifying the Shift Keyboard State. This will ensure that it will be interpreted as a Shifted or Unshifted Key depending on whatever Keyboard State the Keyboard is currently in.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendKeyCodeShiftState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 On  1 
 Off  0 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Send Trigger

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Select the Trigger Signal that will be sent as the Key Behavior for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Trigger is selected for Behavior Type.

Eight possible Trigger Signals are defined, but not all may be supported on all devices. All devices generally support at least one Trigger Signal and generally default to using the first Trigger Signal to activate the Barcode Scanner. Some devices may support additional Trigger Signals and could be configured to use one or more Trigger Signals for some purpose(s) other than Barcode Scanning. Consult the product documentation for a device to determine which Trigger Signals are supported and how they are configured by default to be used.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendTrigger

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Trigger 1  10016 
 Trigger 2  10017 
 Trigger 3  10018 
 Trigger 4  10019 
 Trigger 5  10020 
 Trigger 6  10021 
 Trigger 7  10022 
 Trigger 8  10023 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Send Intent

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Select the circumstances when an Android Intent will be sent as the Key Behavior for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Intent is selected for Behavior Type.

  • If the value On Key Down is selected, the Android Intent will be sent when the Key is activated (pressed) but will NOT be sent again when the Key is deactivated (released).
  • If the value On Key Up is selected, the Android Intent will be NOT be sent when the Key is activated (pressed) but will be sent when the Key is deactivated (released).
  • If the value On Both Key Up and Down is selected, the Android Intent will be sent when the Key is activated (pressed) AND will be sent again when the Key is deactivated (released).

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendIntent

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 On Key Down  1 
 On Key Up  2 
 On Both Key Up and Down  3 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Intent Method

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Select the method via which an Android Intent will be sent to invoke an application or service for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Intent is selected for Behavior Type.

Depending on the application or service to be invoked, there is likely only one method that can be used to successfully invoke a desired function in that application or service. You will need to consult the documentation or developer of a given application or service to determine the method via which a particular Android Intent must be sent to produce the desired function.

  • If the value StartActivity is selected, the Android Intent will be sent using the Android startActivity() method. This method is suitable for invoking Android Activities, which are components that perform user interactions. If the function to be invoked involves interacting with the User, this method will most likely be the correct one to use.

  • If the value Broadcast is selected, the Android Intent will be sent using the Android sendBroadcast() method. This method is suitable for invoking Services, which are components that implement background operations. If the function to be invoked does not involve interacting with the User, this method will most likely be the correct one to use.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendIntentMethod

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 StartActivity  StartActivity 
 Broadcast  Broadcast 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Intent Action

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Enter an Android Intent Action Value for an Intent to be sent to invoke an application or service for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Intent is selected for Behavior Type.

An Android Intent Action Value is NOT mandatory to specify when sending every Android Intent. An Android Intent Action Value is a commonly used method to identify the purpose of an Android Intent. This can be especially important when the application or service to be invoked supports multiple functions, in which case the Android Intent Action Value is commonly used to identify which function to perform when invoking that application or service. When sending an Implicit Intent, which does not specify an exact recipient application or service, it is also common to use the Android Intent Action Value to indicate the function to be performed by whatever application or service ultimately receives the intent. You should consult the documentation or developer of a given application or service to determine the intents it supports and whether a function you want to perform requires an Android Intent Action Value to be supplied.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendIntentAction

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Intent Category

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Enter an Android Intent Category Value for an Android Intent to be sent to invoke an application or service for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Intent is selected for Behavior Type.

An Android Intent Category Value is NOT mandatory to specify when sending every Android Intent. An Android Intent Action Value is a commonly used method to help identify the purpose of an Android Intent. You should consult the documentation or developer of a given application or service to determine the intents it supports and whether a function you want to perform requires an Android Intent Category Value to be supplied.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendIntentCategory

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Intent Package Name

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Enter an Android Package Name Value that will be used to form an Android Component that identifies an application or service to invoke for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Intent is selected for Behavior Type and Intent Class is specified.

An Android Package Name Value is NOT mandatory to specify when sending every Android Intent. An Android Package Name Value is a commonly used, together with an Android Class Name Value, to send an Explicit Intent, which uses an Android Component comprised of a Package Name and a Class name to specify the exact recipient application or service to which the intent will be delivered. Intent Class must also be specified to complete the definition of the Android Component.

Using an Explicit Intent can increase security and is often used when the intent being sent requires any sensitive data. Using an Implicit Intent provides enhanced flexibility since it may be sent to any application or service that has registered its ability to handle that intent and is often used when the intent being sent requires no sensitive data and when it may be desirable to dynamically control which application or service is ultimately invoked to handle the intent.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendIntentPackageName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Intent Class

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Enter an Android Class Name Value that will be used to form an Android Component that identifies an application or service to invoke for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Intent is selected for Behavior Type and Intent Package Name is specified.

An Android Class Name Value is NOT mandatory to specify when sending every Android Intent. An Android Class Name Value is a commonly used, together with an Android Package Name Value, to send an Explicit Intent, which uses an Android Component comprised of a Package Name and a Class name to specify the exact recipient application or service to which the intent will be delivered. Intent Package Name must also be specified to complete the definition of the Android Component.

Using an Explicit Intent can increase security and is often used when the intent being sent requires any sensitive data. Using an Implicit Intent provides enhanced flexibility since it may be sent to any application or service that has registered its ability to handle that intent and is often used when the intent being sent requires no sensitive data and when it may be desirable to dynamically control which application or service is ultimately invoked to handle the intent.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendIntentClass

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Intent Data URI

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Enter a Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) Value that identifies some data to be utilized by the application or service invoked by the intent for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Intent is selected for Behavior Type. It is often advisable, and sometimes required, to specify Intent MIME Type to identify the type of data pointed to by the URI.

A URI Value is NOT mandatory to specify when sending every Android Intent. Whether the application or service that will receive the Intent expects a URI to be specified as part of the intent or not is up to that recipient and/or the definition of the intent that recipient is designed to consume. You should consult the documentation or developer of a given application or service to determine the intents it supports and whether a function you want to perform requires a URI, and possibly a MIME Type, to be supplied.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendIntentDataUri

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Intent MIME Type

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Enter a Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) Type Value to assist the application or service invoked by the intent for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Intent is selected for Behavior Type and Intent Data URI is specified.

A MIME Type Value is NOT mandatory to specify when sending every Android Intent. Whether the application or service that will receive the Intent expects a MIME Type to be specified as part of the intent or not is up to that recipient and/or the definition of the intent that recipient is designed to consume. In some cases, the type may be assumed or may be inferred from the data itself. Setting a MIME Type explicitly, if supported by an application or service, could disable automatic type detection and and force handling according to the specified type. You should consult the documentation or developer of a given application or service to determine the intents it supports and whether a function you want to perform requires a MIME Type to be supplied along with a URI.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendIntentMimeType

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Intent Extra Name 1

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Enter the Name of a String Extra to be attached to the Intent that will be utilized by the application or service invoked by the intent for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Intent is selected for Behavior Type and when Intent Extra Value 1 is specified.

  • If specified, this Extra of type String must be provided as a Name/Value pair specified via Intent Extra Name 1 and Intent Extra Value 1.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendIntentExtraName1

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Intent Extra Name 2

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Enter the Name of a String Extra to be attached to the Intent that will be utilized by the application or service invoked by the intent for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Intent is selected for Behavior Type and when Intent Extra Value 2 is specified.

  • If specified, this Extra of type String must be provided as a Name/Value pair specified via Intent Extra Name 2 and Intent Extra Value 2.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendIntentExtraName2

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Intent Extra Name 3

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Enter the Name of a String Extra to be attached to the Intent that will be utilized by the application or service invoked by the intent for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Intent is selected for Behavior Type and when Intent Extra Value 3 is specified.

  • If specified, this Extra of type String must be provided as a Name/Value pair specified via Intent Extra Name 3 and Intent Extra Value 3.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendIntentExtraName3

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Intent Extra Name 4

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Enter the Name of a String Extra to be attached to the Intent that will be utilized by the application or service invoked by the intent for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Intent is selected for Behavior Type and when Intent Extra Value 4 is specified.

  • If specified, this Extra of type String must be provided as a Name/Value pair specified via Intent Extra Name 4 and Intent Extra Value 4.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendIntentExtraName4

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Intent Extra Name 5

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Enter the Name of a String Extra to be attached to the Intent that will be utilized by the application or service invoked by the intent for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Intent is selected for Behavior Type and when Intent Extra Value 5 is specified.

  • If specified, this Extra of type String must be provided as a Name/Value pair specified via Intent Extra Name 5 and Intent Extra Value 5.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendIntentExtraName5

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Intent Extra Value 1

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Enter the Value of a single String Extra to be attached to the Intent that will be utilized by the application or service invoked by the intent for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Intent is selected for Behavior Type and when Intent Extra Name 1 is specified.

  • If specified, the SINGLE Extra of type String must be provided as a Name/Value pair specified via Intent Extra Name 1 and Intent Extra Value 1.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendIntentExtraValue1

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Intent Extra Value 2

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Enter the Value of a single String Extra to be attached to the Intent that will be utilized by the application or service invoked by the intent for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Intent is selected for Behavior Type and when Intent Extra Name 2 is specified.

  • If specified, the SINGLE Extra of type String must be provided as a Name/Value pair specified via Intent Extra Name 2 and Intent Extra Value 2.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendIntentExtraValue2

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Intent Extra Value 3

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Enter the Value of a single String Extra to be attached to the Intent that will be utilized by the application or service invoked by the intent for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Intent is selected for Behavior Type and when Intent Extra Name 3 is specified.

  • If specified, the SINGLE Extra of type String must be provided as a Name/Value pair specified via Intent Extra Name 3 and Intent Extra Value 3.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendIntentExtraValue3

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Intent Extra Value 4

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Enter the Value of a single String Extra to be attached to the Intent that will be utilized by the application or service invoked by the intent for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Intent is selected for Behavior Type and when Intent Extra Name 4 is specified.

  • If specified, the SINGLE Extra of type String must be provided as a Name/Value pair specified via Intent Extra Name 4 and Intent Extra Value 4.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendIntentExtraValue4

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Intent Extra Value 5

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Enter the Value of a single String Extra to be attached to the Intent that will be utilized by the application or service invoked by the intent for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Intent is selected for Behavior Type and when Intent Extra Name 5 is specified.

  • If specified, the SINGLE Extra of type String must be provided as a Name/Value pair specified via Intent Extra Name 5 and Intent Extra Value 5.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendIntentExtraValue5

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Intent Flags

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Enter a value that encodes one or more Android Intent Flags to be set for the Intent to be sent to invoke an application or service for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Intent is selected for Behavior Type.

Android Intent Flags control how an Intent is handled by Android and/or by the application or service that receives the Intent. Further:

  • Some Android Intent Flags are specific to the type of Android Component that will be invoked by the Intent (e.g. activity vs service).

  • Whether certain Android Intent Flags are needed to invoke a desired function is up to that recipient and/or the definition of the intent that recipient is designed to consume.

  • Android Intent Flags MUST be specified as a hexadecimal value with the appropriate bits set for any flag or flags desired.

  • Consult the Android documentation to translate intent flag names, when needed, into their appropriate hexadecimal values.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendIntentFlags

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Send Intent - Intent Add Key Event

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Select whether the information about the Key Event should be attached to Intent to be sent to invoke an application or service for a specified Key when activated in a specified Keyboard State and when the value Send Intent is selected for Behavior Type.

Mapping is performed by responding to Key Events that indicate when a Key is being activated (pressed) or deactivated (released). When sending an Intent as the Key Behavior for a Key, the Intent can be sent when the Key is activated (pressed), deactivated (released), or both. When the same Intent is sent for both activation and deactivation, it may be important to the Android Component that is receiving and consuming the Intent to differentiate the two cases.

  • If the value Attach is selected, the Android Intent sent will have the Key Event attached, allowing the consumer of the Intent to determine whether the Intent was sent as a result of the Key being activated (pressed) or deactivated (released).

  • If the value Don't Attach is selected, the Android Intent sent will NOT have the Key Event attached, preventing the consumer of the Intent from determining whether the Intent was sent as a result of the Key being activated (pressed) or deactivated (released).

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeSendIntentAddKeyEvent

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Attach  1 
 Don't Attach  0 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Launch Application Name

   Keyboard Mappings  >  Keyboard Mapping  >  Behaviors  >  Behavior

Enter the Application Friendly Name that identifies an application to be launched when the value Launch Application is selected for Behavior Type.

Note that the Application Friendly Name is NOT the same as the Android Package Name. The Application Friendly Name is generally the name by which the application is identified in in-device UI. Launching an application by its Application Friendly Name is generally simpler and hence may be more convenient for an administrator than launching that application by its Android Package Name.

To launch an application by its Application Friendly Name, all the administrator needs to supply is that name. the Application Friendly Name is easily discoverable in-device in a variety of ways, including:

  • The Application Friendly Name may be displayed in the Title Bar of the application's UI.

  • The Application Friendly Names of recently launched applications are typically displayed in the Recent Applications panel.

  • The Application Friendly Name is displayed in the AppInfo section of the Settings UI for an application.

To launch an application based on its Android Package Name, the value Send Intent should be selected for Behavior Type and much more information, including Android Package Name, which may be harder to discover, will need to be provided to send the right Intent to launch the application.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keymappingBehaviorTypeLaunchApplicationName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.


License Configuration

Use this Group to configure Enterprise Reset Persistence, Licenses, and Features.

Detail Information:

  • Key = licenseConfig

  • Type = bundle

Enterprise Reset Persistence

   License Configuration

Enter the name of the partition on the local server from which to pull a license. Leave blank to pull from a non-partitioned license pool

Detail Information:

  • Key = licensePersistence

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Turn On  1 
 Turn Off  2 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.2.

Licenses

   License Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more License(s) to Activate from Server(s) using AID(s) and/or to Activate from Local File(s).

Detail Information:

  • Key = licenses

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

License

   License Configuration  >  Licenses

Use this Sub-group to configure Activation Source, Activation ID, Custom Server URL, Custom Server Friendly Name, and Local File Path and Name.

Detail Information:

  • Key = license

  • Type = bundle

Activation Source

   License Configuration  >  Licenses  >  License

Select the Source from which a License for a Zebra capability will be acquired.

Detail Information:

  • Key = activationSource

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Production Cloud Direct  1 
 Production Cloud Proxy  2 
 Cloud / Local Server  3 
 Local File Production Cloud  4 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 7.1.

Activation ID

   License Configuration  >  Licenses  >  License

Enter the Activation ID (AID) to be used when acquiring a License for a Zebra capability from a Server.

Detail Information:

  • Key = activationID

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 7.1.

Custom Server URL

   License Configuration  >  Licenses  >  License

Enter the URL of the specific Custom Server from which a License for a Zebra capability will be acquired.

Detail Information:

  • Key = licenseCustomServerUrl

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 7.1.

Custom Server Friendly Name

   License Configuration  >  Licenses  >  License

Enter the Friendly Name to be associated with the Custom Server from which a License for a Zebra capability will be acquired.

Detail Information:

  • Key = licenseCustomServerFriendlyName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 7.1.

Local File Path and Name

   License Configuration  >  Licenses  >  License

Enter the Path and Name of a local File in the Device File System from which a License for a Zebra capability will be acquired.

Detail Information:

  • Key = licenseLocalFilePathAndName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 7.1.

Features

   License Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Feature(s) to be Acquired directly from Customer License Server Instance(s).

Detail Information:

  • Key = features

  • Type = bundle_array

Feature

   License Configuration  >  Features

Use this Sub-group to configure Name, Server URL, Server Friendly Name, and Partition Name.

Detail Information:

  • Key = feature

  • Type = bundle

Name

   License Configuration  >  Features  >  Feature

Enter the Name of the Zebra Feature for which licensing will be acquired.

Detail Information:

  • Key = licenseFeatureName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Server URL

   License Configuration  >  Features  >  Feature

Enter the server URL from which licensing for a Zebra Feature will be acquired.

Detail Information:

  • Key = licenseFeatureServerUrl

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Server Friendly Name

   License Configuration  >  Features  >  Feature

Enter the Friendly Name to be assigned to the Server from which licensing for a Zebra Feature will be acquired.

Detail Information:

  • Key = licenseFeatureServerFriendlyName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Partition Name

   License Configuration  >  Features  >  Feature

Enter the Friendly Name to be assigned to the Server from which licensing for a Zebra Feature will be acquired.

Detail Information:

  • Key = licenseLocalServerPartitionName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.2.

Package Configuration

Use this Array to configure one or more Package(s)

Each Android Package of the given type will generally exhibit the same standard behaviors unless explicitly overridden by an Administrator. Android Packages of different types may exhibit different standard behaviors unless explicitly overridden by an Administrator.

This Sub-array allows an Administrator to identify Android Packages, by their Android Package Names, whose exhibited behavior should deviate from the standard behaviors that would otherwise apply based on their types. Any Android Packages whose Android Package Names are not specified in this Sub-array will exhibit the standard behaviors appropriate to their type.

The following high-level behaviors could be altered using this Sub-array.:

  • Allowed Services

Zebra Android devices implement a variety of System Services that are generally available for use only by Trusted Applications. In some cases, there may be a need to grant such access to otherwise Non-Trusted Applications. In such cases, the Administrator can use Allowed Services to grant an application that he trusts, access to use one or more selected System Services.

  • Permissions

Zebra Android devices have a variety of System Permissions that control access to System APIs that are generally available for use only by Trusted Applications. In some cases, there may be a need to grant such permissions to otherwise Non-Trusted Applications. In such cases, the Administrator can use Permissions to grant an application that he trusts, permission to use one or more System APIs.

  • Class Variances

Zebra Android devices have a variety of standard application behaviors that an Administrator might want to adjust. In such cases, the Administrator can use one or more of the following Class Variances to specify which of the available deviations from behaviors to use for an application.

  • Feature Variances

Zebra Android devices have a variety of standard application behaviors that an Administrator might want to adjust. In such cases, the Administrator can use one or more of the following Feature Variances to specify which of the available deviations from behaviors to use for an application.

This Sub-array is used to provide a list of Android Packages for which deviations from standard behaviors will be configured.

  • If this Sub-array has never been specified (never included in the MCs sent), then no configuration of deviation from standard behaviors will be made and hence all Android Packages will have standard behaviors.

  • If this Sub-array is not specified (not included in the MCs sent), then no changes will be made to the configuration defined by any previously specified Sub-array.

  • If this Sub-array is specified (included in the MCs sent), then the specified Sub-array will entirely replace the configuration defined by any previously specified Sub-array.

Note that it is NOT possible to specify an "empty" Sub-array (with zero elements). Every Sub-array must contain at least one element. Any element(s) in this Sub-array where a blank (empty string) value is entered for Package Name will be ignored. It is therefore possible to specify a "virtually empty" Sub-array by entering a blank (empty string) value for Package Name in every element of the Sub-array.

  • If this Sub-array is specified (included in the MCs sent), but that Sub-array is "virtually empty", as described above, then all deviation from standard behaviors previously configured by any previously specified Sub-array will be removed, thus returning all Android Packages to standard behaviors, returning to a state equivalent to when no Sub-array had ever been specified. .

Detail Information:

  • Key = pkgConfig

  • Type = bundle_array

Package

   Package Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Class Name, Package Name, Package Signing Certificate, Permissions, Class Variances, Feature Variances, and Allowed Services for a single Android Package.

Detail Information:

  • Key = package

  • Type = bundle

Class Name

   Package Configuration  >  Package

Enter the Class Name within the Android Package for which one or more non-default class related behaviors should be configured.

  • If the Class Name is left blank (empty string), then the elements of the Class Variances Sub-array in which it appears will be ignored.

  • If the Class Name is non-blank (non-empty string), then the element of the Class Variances Sub-array in which it appears will be processed and the entered Class Name will identify the class within the Android Package for which this element of the Package Configuration Sub-array will define one or more deviations from standard behaviors should be configured.

Detail Information:

  • Key = packageClassName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

Package Name

   Package Configuration  >  Package

Enter the Package Name of an Android Package for which one or more deviations from standard behaviors should be configured. z

  • If the Package Name is left blank (empty string), then the element of the Package Configuration Sub-array in which it appears will be ignored.

  • If the Package Name is non-blank (non-empty string), then the element of the Package Configuration Sub-array in which it appears will be processed and the entered Package Name will identify the Android Package for which this element of the Package Configuration Sub-array will define one or more deviations from standard behaviors should be configured.

Detail Information:

  • Key = packagePackageNameName

  • Type = string

Package Signing Certificate

   Package Configuration  >  Package

Enter the Package Signing Certificate that will be used to verify that the Android Package identified by the Package Name entered for Package Name is a genuine instance of that Android Package for which one or more deviations from standard behaviors should be configured.

The value specified must be the Base 64 encoded string representing the exact binary contents of the DER-format (e.g, a .CRT file) public certificate file used to sign the Android Package. This value can be obtained in the proper format from an .APK file for an Android Package by using the Zebra App Signature Tool.

Note that not all deviations from standard behaviors require verification that the Android Package is genuine and hence the Package Signing Certificate can be left blank (empty string) when it is not required. The deviations from standard behaviors that require verification are the following that grant special privileges to the Android Package:

  • Allowed Services

  • Permissions

Detail Information:

  • Key = packagePackageSigningCertifcate

  • Type = string

Permissions

   Package Configuration  >  Package

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Sensitive Android Permissions.

Detail Information:

  • Key = packagePermissions

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.4.

Permission

   Package Configuration  >  Package  >  Permissions

Use this Sub-group to configure Name and State for a single Sensitive Android Permission.

Detail Information:

  • Key = packagePermission

  • Type = bundle

Name

   Package Configuration  >  Package  >  Permissions  >  Permission

Select the name of a Sensitive Android Permission to be Granted to an Android Package. Select the name of a Sensitive Android Permission for which deviation from the standard behavior will be configured for an Android Package.

Detail Information:

  • Key = permissionName

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Access Notifications  android.permission.ACCESS_NOTIFICATIONS 
 Package Usage Stats  android.permission.PACKAGE_USAGE_STATS 
 System Alert Window  android.permission.SYSTEM_ALERT_WINDOW 
 Get AppOps Stats  android.permission.GET_APP_OPS_STATS 
 Battery Stats  android.permission.BATTERY_STATS 
 Manage External Storage  android.permission.MANAGE_EXTERNAL_STORAGE 
 Bind Notification Listener  [binary data] 
 Read Logs (specially trusted Zebra apps only)  android.permission.READ_LOGS 

State

   Package Configuration  >  Package  >  Permissions  >  Permission

Select the State to to configure deviation from the standard behavior for Sensitive Android Permission for an Android Package.

  • If the value Grant is selected, then a Sensitive Android Permission will be Granted to the Android Package.

  • If the value Deny is selected, then a Sensitive Android Permission will be Denied from the Android Package.

  • If the value Prompt User is selected, then the User will be presented with dialog asking for permission to the Sensitive Android Permission for the Android Package.

Note that since Prompt User is the standard behavior for all Sensitive Android Permissions, this value is not really required, since the same effect can be obtained by removing the Sensitive Android Permission from the Permissions Sub-array. This is because not explicitly specifying a deviation from the standard behavior for a Sensitive Android Permission will result in the standard behavior. Similarly, if the Package Name is removed from the Package Configuration Sub-array then all Sensitive Android Permissions will return to standard behavior for that Android Package. It is not necessary to explicitly assign the standard behavior.

Detail Information:

  • Key = permissionState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Grant  1 
 Deny  2 
 Prompt User  3 

Class Variances

   Package Configuration  >  Package

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Class variance(s) that an application will is Allowed to use.

Detail Information:

  • Key = packageClassVariances

  • Type = bundle_array

Class Variance

   Package Configuration  >  Package  >  Class Variances

Use this Sub-group to configure Variance Type.

Detail Information:

  • Key = packageClassVariance

  • Type = bundle

Variance Type

   Package Configuration  >  Package  >  Class Variances  >  Class Variance

Select a Type of Class Variance that should be applied to an Android Package.

Detail Information:

  • Key = classVarianceType

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Set as default Input Method  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

Feature Variances

   Package Configuration  >  Package

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Feature Variance(s) (deviations from the standard behaviors of Android Packages) that should apply to Android Packages.

Detail Information:

  • Key = packageFeatureVariances

  • Type = bundle_array

Feature Variance

   Package Configuration  >  Package  >  Feature Variances

Use this Sub-group to configure Variance Type.

Detail Information:

  • Key = packageFeatureVariance

  • Type = bundle

Variance Type

   Package Configuration  >  Package  >  Feature Variances  >  Feature Variance

Select a Type of Feature Variance that should be applied to an Android Package.

Detail Information:

  • Key = packageVarianceType

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Disallow Background Data  1 
 Exempt from Battery Optimization  2 
 Disallow Launch  3 
 Use a Reserved UID  6 
 Disallow App From Upgrade  7 
 Hide Notifications  8 
 Set as default dialer  9 
 Set as default browser  10 
 Set as default launcher  11 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 9.3.

Allowed Services

   Package Configuration  >  Package

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more System Service(s) that an application will is Allowed to use.

Detail Information:

  • Key = packageAllowedServices

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 8.3.

Allowed Service

   Package Configuration  >  Package  >  Allowed Services

Use this Sub-group to configure Service Identifier.

Detail Information:

  • Key = packageAllowedService

  • Type = bundle

Service Identifier

   Package Configuration  >  Package  >  Allowed Services  >  Allowed Service

Enter the Service Identifier that identifies functionality of a System Service that an Android Package will be allowed to use.

A Service Identifier is a string value defined by the implementer of a System Service that identifies specific functionality within that System Service to which access will be controlled. A given System Service can choose to implement functionality that is NOT controlled by a Service Identifier and/or can defined multiple Service Identifiers to apply varying controls on different types of functionality. Consult the documentation for a given System Service to determine which, if any, Service Identifier(s) might be required to utilize the desired functionality of that System Service. Each Service Identifier that identifies functionality in a System Service to which usage will be allowed for a given Android Package must be configured through an element of the Permissions Sub-array for that Android Package.

Detail Information:

  • Key = packageAllowedServiceIdentifier

  • Type = string


Security and Privacy Configuration

Use this Group to configure Encryption, Screen Lock, and SD Card Setup Notification.

Detail Information:

  • Key = securityAndPrivacyConfig

  • Type = bundle

Encryption Configuration

   Security and Privacy Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Encryption Keys and SD Card Encrypt Key Name.

Detail Information:

  • Key = encryptConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Encryption Keys

   Security and Privacy Configuration  >  Encryption Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Encryption Key(s).

Detail Information:

  • Key = securityEncryptionKeys

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

Encryption Key

   Security and Privacy Configuration  >  Encryption Configuration  >  Encryption Keys

Use this Sub-group to configure Key Name and Key Value.

Detail Information:

  • Key = securityEncryptionKey

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Key Name

   Security and Privacy Configuration  >  Encryption Configuration  >  Encryption Keys  >  Encryption Key

Enter the Key Name of a Named Encryption Key.

You must also specify Key Value to provide the Key Value to be added for the specified Named Encryption Key.

Detail Information:

  • Key = securityKeyName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Key Value

   Security and Privacy Configuration  >  Encryption Configuration  >  Encryption Keys  >  Encryption Key

Enter the Key Value of a Named Encryption Key.

A Key Value must be a string value containing exactly 64 hexadecimal characters ("0-9" and/or "A-F" characters) that encode a 256 bit binary value for an AES encryption key.

The Key Value can be generated in any manner desired as long as it is a 256 bit binary value and is represented as 64 hexadecimal characters, although in most cases, best practice would be to randomly generate Key Values to maximize their effectiveness in protecting data.

Detail Information:

  • Key = securityKeyValue

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

SD Card Encrypt Key Name

   Security and Privacy Configuration  >  Encryption Configuration

Enter the Key Name of a Named Encryption Key to be used to encrypt the removable SD Card.

Detail Information:

  • Key = securitySDCardEncryptKeyName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

Screen Lock Configuration

   Security and Privacy Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Instant Screen Lock on Power Key, Lock Screen Wallpaper, Custom Lock Screen Wallpaper, Screen Lock Type, Notifications on Lock Screen, Screen Lock Timeout, and User Selection of Secure Start-up.

Detail Information:

  • Key = screenLockConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Instant Screen Lock on Power Key

   Security and Privacy Configuration  >  Screen Lock Configuration

Select whether the device will Instantly Lock when the Power Key is used to turn the Display Off.

  • If the value Off is selected, the device will NOT Instantly Lock when the Power Key is used to turn the Display Off. This will produce behavior comparable to when the device times out and Automatically turns the Display Off.

If the Display remains off for longer than Duration set via Screen Lock Timeout, then the device will become Locked, requiring it to be Unlocked in the manner specified via Screen Lock Type.

If the Display remains off for less than Duration set via Screen Lock Timeout, then the device will NOT become Locked.

  • If the value On is selected, the device WILL Instantly Lock when the Power Key is used to turn the Display Off, requiring it to be Unlocked in the manner specified via Screen Lock Type.

Detail Information:

  • Key = securitySLPowerKeyInstantLock

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  Off 
 On  On 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

Lock Screen Wallpaper

   Security and Privacy Configuration  >  Screen Lock Configuration

Select the wallpaper to use on the lock screen of the device.

  • If the value Restore to default is selected, the default lock screen wallpaper will be used.

  • If the value Custom is selected, the custom wallpaper specified in %?securityAndPrivacyConfig.screenLockConfig.securitySLCustomLockWallpaper% will be used on the lock screen.

Detail Information:

  • Key = securitySLLockScreenWallpaper

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Restore to default  1 
 Custom  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.5.

Custom Lock Screen Wallpaper

   Security and Privacy Configuration  >  Screen Lock Configuration

Enter the path and file name of an image file on the device (.jpg or .png)

Detail Information:

  • Key = securitySLCustomLockWallpaper

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.5.

Screen Lock Type

   Security and Privacy Configuration  >  Screen Lock Configuration

Select the type of lock that is used to protect the device from use by unauthorized persons.

  • If the value None is selected, no lock will be applied and the device can be used by anyone.

  • If the value Swipe is selected, unlocking will require only a simple swipe and the device can be used by anyone.

  • If the value PIN is selected, unlocking will require entry of a PIN (personal identification number) and the device can only be unlocked by someone knowing the correct PIN value.

  • If the value Password is selected, unlocking will require entry of a password and the device can only be unlocked by someone knowing the correct password value.

  • If the value Pattern is selected, unlocking will require drawing a pattern on the screen using the touch panel and the device can only be unlocked by someone knowing the correct pattern.

Detail Information:

  • Key = securitySLScreenLockType

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 None  5 
 Swipe  1 
 PIN  3 
 Password  4 
 Pattern  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 6.0.

Notifications on Lock Screen

   Security and Privacy Configuration  >  Screen Lock Configuration

Select the types of notifications to show on the lock screen

  • If the value Show all content is selected, all notifications will be shown.

  • If the value Show only non-sensitive content is selected, only non-sensitive content will be shown.

  • If the value Hide notifications is selected, all notifications will be hidden.

Detail Information:

  • Key = securitySLNotificationsOnLockScreen

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Show all content  1 
 Show only non-sensitive content  2 
 Hide notifications  3 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.5.

Screen Lock Timeout

   Security and Privacy Configuration  >  Screen Lock Configuration

Select what happens when a device turns off as a result of a timeout.

  • If the device stays off for at least the time specified, the device will be locked and an unlock will be required when the device is turned back on, if any lock was configured using Screen Lock Type.

  • If the device stays off for less than the time specified, the device will NOT be locked and hence no unlock will be required when the device is turned back on, even if a lock was configured using Screen Lock Type.

Detail Information:

  • Key = securitySLScreenLockTimeout

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Immediately after Display Timeout  1 
 5 seconds after Display Timeout  5 
 15 seconds after Display Timeout  15 
 30 seconds after Display Timeout  30 
 1 minute after Display Timeout  60 
 2 minutes after Display Timeout  120 
 5 minutes after Display Timeout  300 
 10 minutes after Display Timeout  600 
 30 minutes after Display Timeout  1800 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

User Selection of Secure Start-up

   Security and Privacy Configuration  >  Screen Lock Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to Select (Turn On) Secure Start-up when changing pin/password/pattern.

Detail Information:

  • Key = securitySLSecureStartupDialog

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Enable the YES button  1 
 Disable the YES button  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.0.

SD Card Setup Notification

   Security and Privacy Configuration

Select whether to present the user with the notification when an SD card is inserted.

  • If the value Do not change is selected, then no change will be made to the setting for whether the dialog will be presented to the user.

  • If the value Showis selected, the user will be presented with the dialog box notifying that an SD Card has been inserted.

  • If the value Hide is selected, the user will not be presented with the dialog box notifying that an SD Card has been inserted.

Detail Information:

  • Key = sdConfigPopup

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change  0 
 Show  1 
 Hide  2 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.5.


System Configuration

Use this Group to configure Analytics, Clock, Data Wipe, GMS, Lifeguard, Power, Remote Scanner Configurations, Wake-Up, Pass-Through Command, and Logs.

Detail Information:

  • Key = systemConfig

  • Type = bundle

Analytics Configuration

   System Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Analytics State and User Control of Analytics State.

Detail Information:

  • Key = analyticsConfig

  • Type = bundle

Analytics State

   System Configuration  >  Analytics Configuration

Select whether the Analytics Client will collect machine data from the device and send it to Zebra.

The Analytics Client is turned on (enabled) by default on all devices:

  • If the value Off is selected, the Analytics Client will NOT collect machine data from the device nor will it send such data to Zebra.

  • If the value On is selected, the Analytics Client WILL collect machine data from the device and send such data to Zebra when connectivity is available.

Note that on some devices, the ability to turn off (disable) the Analytics Client may not be supported.

Detail Information:

  • Key = sysAnalyticsState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

User Control of Analytics State

   System Configuration  >  Analytics Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to control whether the Analytics Client will collect machine data from the device and send it to Zebra.

The Analytics Client is turned on (enabled) by default on all devices:

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to control whether the Analytics Client will collect machine data from the device and send it to Zebra

  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to control whether the Analytics Client will collect machine data from the device and send it to Zebra

Detail Information:

  • Key = sysAnalyticsUserControlState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 7.2.

Clock Configuration

   System Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Time Mode, Auto NTP Server Address, Auto NTP Drift Interval, Auto NTP Sync Interval, Time Zone Mode, Manual Time Zone, and Time Format

The following defined terms are important to understand:

GMT (See Greenwich Mean Time)

Greenwich Mean Time

Greenwich Mean Time refers to the Local Time at the Royal Observatory in Greenwich, London, which matches and is used as the basis for Coordinated Universal Time.

UTC (See Coordinated Universal Time)

Universal Time Coordinates (See Coordinated Universal Time)

Coordinated Universal Time

Coordinated Universal Time is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks and time and has a primary characteristic of being location independent. The time specified in Coordinated Universal Time is the same as Greenwich Mean Time.

Local Time

Local Time refers to the agreed-upon time observed time at a location that has elected to operate as part of a Time Zone.

Time Zone

Time Zone refers to a logical, and usually geographical, location where the Local Time observed may vary from the Local Time observed at other locations. Time Zone is also used to refer to the rules by which a Local Time to be observed at a location is computed based on Coordinated Universal Time. For example, Local Time might be computed using a fixed offset from Coordinated Universal Time and/or using a seasonable adjustment (e.g., Daylight Saving).

Daylight Saving

Daylight Saving refers to a seasonable variation in the Local Time observed at a location that has elected to operate as part of a Time Zone. For example, Local Time might be adjusted forward by one hour during that portion of the year when days are longer.

NTP (See Network Time Protocol)

Network Time Protocol

Network Time Protocol refers to a communication protocol used to communicate to a Time Server to acquire the current time and date, typically used to synchronize the clock on a client to the clock on the Time Server.

Time Server

Time Server refers to a server used as a trusted authority from which the current time and date can be acquired via some communication protocol, such as NTP .

Detail Information:

  • Key = clockConfig

  • Type = bundle

Time Mode

   System Configuration  >  Clock Configuration

Select the mode via which the time and date will be set on a device.

  • If the value Automatic is selected, the time and date will be acquired and set automatically on a device via communication with a Time Server.

  • If the value Manual is selected, the time and date will NOT be acquired and set automatically on a device via communication with a Time Server. In such cases, the time and date might be set manually on the device, by the User, or through some other means (e.g. by an application).

Detail Information:

  • Key = sysClockTimeMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Manual  false 
 Automatic  true 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 4.2.

Auto NTP Server Address

   System Configuration  >  Clock Configuration

Enter the IP address or URI of the Time Server that supports NTP from which the time and date on a device will be acqiured and set automatically when the value Automatic is selected for Time Mode.

Detail Information:

  • Key = sysClockAutoNtpServer

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 4.2.

Auto NTP Drift Interval

   System Configuration  >  Clock Configuration

Enter the maximum difference between the time on-device and the NTP server time after which the time will be attempted to be acquired and set automatically.

Detail Information:

  • Key = sysClockAutoNtpDriftInterval

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.7.

Auto NTP Sync Interval

   System Configuration  >  Clock Configuration

Select the interval at which the time and date will be attempted to be acquired and set automatically when the value Automatic is selected for Time Mode.

  • If the value 30 minutes is selected, the time and date will be attempted to be acquired and set automatically on a device via communication with a Time Server once every 30 minutes.

  • If the value 60 minutes is selected, the time and date will be attempted to be acquired and set automatically on a device via communication with a Time Server once each hour.

  • If the value 6 hours is selected, the time and date will be attempted to be acquired and set automatically on a device via communication with a Time Server once every 6 hours.

  • If the value 24 hours is selected, the time and date will be attempted to be acquired and set automatically on a device via communication with a Time Server once per day.

Detail Information:

  • Key = sysClockAutoNtpSyncInterval

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 30 minutes  00:30:00 
 60 minutes  00:60:00 
 6 hours  06:00:00 
 24 hours  24:00:00 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 4.2.

Time Zone Mode

   System Configuration  >  Clock Configuration

Select how the Time Zone will be configured on a device.

  • If the value Automatic is selected, the Time Zone will be acquired and set automatically from a Network Identity and Time Zone (NITZ) source.

  • If the value Automatic is selected, the Time Zone will NOT be acquired and set automatically from a Network Identity and Time Zone (NITZ) source. In such cases, the Time Zone might be set manually on the device, by the User, or through some other means (e.g. by an application).

Detail Information:

  • Key = sysClockTimeZoneMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Manual  false 
 Automatic  true 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 6.0.

Manual Time Zone

   System Configuration  >  Clock Configuration

Enter a string value that identifies the Time Zone to be set explicitly when Manual is set for Time Zone Mode.

The string value has a maximum size of 255 characters.

  • If the value is empty (zero length string), then the current Time Zone will NOT be changed.

  • If the value GMT is specified then the Time Zone will be set to Greenwich Mean Time, causing Local Time to be identical to UTC.

  • If a value starting with the prefix GMT, followed by a positive or negative offset in hours or hours and minutes is specified then the Time Zone will be set based on that offset from UTC.

For example:

  • GMT-10 would be 10 hours BEHIND Greenwich Mean Time.

  • GMT+05:30 would be 5 hours and 30 minutes AHEAD of Greenwich Mean Time.

  • If a value matching an Olsen/tz Time Zone identifier (i.e. "America/New_York") is specified, then the Time Zone will be set based on the characteristics of the identified well-known Time Zone.

Detail Information:

  • Key = sysClockTimeZone

  • Type = string

Time Format

   System Configuration  >  Clock Configuration

Select how time values will be formatted when displayed on a device.

  • If the value 12 is selected, time values will be displayed in 12 hour (AM/PM) format.

  • If the value 24 is selected, time values will be displayed in 24 hour (military) format.

Detail Information:

  • Key = sysClockTimeFormat

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 12  2 
 24  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 6.0.

Data Wipe Configuration

   System Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Data Wipe Options and Bypass SUW on Enterprise Reset

Sometimes it may become necessary or desirable to Wipe some or all device data. To understand when and why it might be appropriate to Wipe device data, it is important to understand the different types of device data that could exist, and which could be Wiped.

  • Primary Storage

Primary Storage is flash memory that is allocated to hold data, organized as files, that is produced and stored while the device is running. Every Zebra Android device has some form of Primary Storage. although the size and utilization of it may vary from device to device. This is where standard Android folders, such as /sdcard and /data are located. Primary Storage is the "workhorse" storage of the device and is frequently read, written, and updated during normal device operation. All data stored in Primary Storage is encrypted by the system using device unique keys.

  • Persistent Storage

Persistent Storage is flash memory that is allocated to hold data, which may or may not be organized as files, that needs to be more Persistent than Primary Storage. Every Zebra Android device has some form of Persistent Storage. although the size and methods required to access it may vary from device to device. This is where the Zebra-proprietary folder /enterprise, on devices that have it, is located. Persistent Storage is commonly used to store applications, configuration, and data that collectively define a "known good state" to which a device can be returned by Wiping Primary Storage but preserving Persistent Storage. Data stored in Persistent Storage is not necessarily encrypted by the system.

  • Portable Storage

Portable Storage is flash memory on a Removable Micro SD Card that is used to hold data, organized as files, that is physically removable from the device itself. Not every Zebra Android device supports Portable Storage, and among devices that do, the size(s) of cards supported may vary. Portable Storage may be used to import data into a device, export data from a device, share data amongst devices, etc. Over time, the types of data that can usefully be stored and accessed on Portable Storage has become more and more limited, and likely will be even more restricted in the future. Data stored in Portable Storage can optionally be encrypted. Any one Removable Micro SD Card can only be used for Portable Storage or Adopted Storage at any given time and switching between the two requires Wiping of all data from the card.

  • Adopted Storage

Adopted Storage is flash memory on a Removable Micro SD Card that is used to extend Primary Storage. Even through the card is physically removable from the device, once adopted, it should not be removed since it can negatively impact the continuing operation of the device. Unlike Portable Storage, Adopted Storage CANNOT be used to import data into a device, export data from a device, share data amongst devices, etc. All data stored in Adopted Storage is encrypted in the same manner as the Primary Storage it extends. Wiping Primary Storage does NOT directly Wipe Adopted Storage but does render the data on the card unusable.

The following types of Data Wipe are supported:

  • Enterprise Reset

Enterprise Reset causes Primary Storage to be Wiped, all data in Adopted Storage to be invalidated, and all data in Persistent Storage and Portable Storage to be preserved. When performing an Enterprise Reset, a flag is kept in Persistent Storage to indicate that it has been done. This flag is used to prevent repetition of Enterprise Reset from being performed if another request to Wipe Primary Storage is sent again after the Enterprise Reset. If another Enterprise Reset is later desired, the request to Wipe Persistent Storage must be removed, by removing the Primary Storage option. This will cause the flag to be removed and allow a subsequent Enterprise Reset to be performed once the Primary Storage is specified again. Enterprise Reset is typically used to return a device a previously stored "known good" state, based on applications, configurations, and data that were previously stored Persistently, and hence should be performed relatively infrequently.

  • Factory Reset

Factory Reset is identical to Enterprise Reset with the exception that all data in Persistent Storage is also Wiped. Because Persistent Storage is also Wiped, the approach described above for storing a flag in Persistent Storage cannot be used to prevent repetition of Factory Reset from being performed if another request to Wipe Primary Storage is sent again after the Factory Reset. Factory Reset is typically used to forcibly terminate management of a device, either to enable repurposing of the device, to prepare for the device for servicing, etc. and hence should be performed very infrequently. When enrolling a device for management at a later time, following an earlier request to perform a Factory Reset, care should be taken to avoid resending the same options, since nothing will prevent Factory Reset from being performed again, if requested.

Notes:

  • The data to be Wiped is requested by specifying one or more Data Wipe Option Types within Data Wipe Option Type Sub-groups as elements of this Sub-array.

  • Each Data Wipe Option Type specifies a specific storage area to be Wiped and the type of Wipe operation(s) to be performed is chosen to ensure that all requested data will be Wiped.

  • In some cases, it may not be possible to Wipe one storage area without also Wiping another storage area.

  • If the combination of storage areas requested to be Wiped cannot be performed without Wiping additional storage areas that are NOT requested, then NOTHING will be Wiped, since no data will be Wiped unless specifically requested. For example, if ONLY Persistent Storage is specified, then nothing will be Wiped since it is not possible to Wipe Persistent Storage without ALSO Wiping Primary Storage. .

Detail Information:

  • Key = dataWipeConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 7.1.

Data Wipe Options

   System Configuration  >  Data Wipe Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Data Wipe Option(s) .

Detail Information:

  • Key = dataWipeDataWipeOptions

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Data Wipe Option

   System Configuration  >  Data Wipe Configuration  >  Data Wipe Options

Use this Sub-group to configure Data Wipe Option Type.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dataWipeDataWipeOption

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Data Wipe Option Type

   System Configuration  >  Data Wipe Configuration  >  Data Wipe Options  >  Data Wipe Option

Select the Type for a single Data Wipe Option to request that a specified device storage area be Wiped.

  • If the value Primary Storage is selected, then Primary Storage will be Wiped, also invalidating Adopted Storage if it is being used. This value will result in either an Enterprise Reset or a Factory Reset being performed, depending on what other Data Wipe Option Type(s) are also specified in Data Wipe Options.

  • If the value Persistent Storage is selected, then Persistent Storage will be Wiped, but only if this value is specified in addition to value Primary Storage. Primary Storage must also be specified since it is only possible to Wipe Persistent Storage when also Wiping Primary Storage, by doing a Factory Reset, and all storage areas to be Wiped must be explicitly specified.

  • If the value Portable Storage is selected, then Portable Storage will be Wiped, but only if this value is specified in addition to value Primary Storage. Primary Storage must also be specified since it is not possible to Wipe Portable Storage without also Wiping Primary Storage, by doing an Enterprise Reset or a Factory Reset, and only storage areas that are specifically specified will be Wiped. This value can optionally be used together with value Persistent Storage.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dataWipeDataWipeOptionType

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Primary Storage  1 
 Persistent Storage  2 
 Portable Storage  4 

Bypass SUW on Enterprise Reset

   System Configuration  >  Data Wipe Configuration

Select whether the Google Setup Wizard (SUW) should be bypassed when an Enterprise Reset is performed as a Data Wipe when Primary Storage is included as a Data Wipe Option Type in a Data Wipe Option in Data Wipe Options.

  • If the value Yes is selected, then the Google Setup Wizard (SUW) will be bypassed each time an Enterprise Reset is performed as a Data Wipe.

  • If the value No is selected, then the Google Setup Wizard (SUW) will NOT be bypassed each time an Enterprise Reset is performed as a Data Wipe.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dataWipeBypassSUWonEnterpriseReset

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Yes  1 
 No  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

GMS Configuration

   System Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure GMS Feature Set and GMS Profile.

Detail Information:

  • Key = gmsConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.3.

GMS Feature Set

   System Configuration  >  GMS Configuration

Select the amount of functionality of Google Mobile Services (GMS) to enable.

  • If the value All - Full Set of GMS Features is selected, the the entire set of Google Mobile Services (GMS), will be enabled for use.

Note that if Google Mobile Services are allowed to be used, may collect and send data to Google.

  • If the value Restricted - Fixed Minimal Set of GMS Features is selected, a limited (fixed) subset of Google Mobile Services (GMS), will be enabled for use. The subset will automatically be chosen to ensure that basic device functionality is not impaired, that all enabled Google Mobile Services operate usefully, and that no enabled Google Mobile Services send any data to Google.

  • If the value Profiled - Selected Subset of GMS Features is selected, a selected subset of Google Mobile Services (GMS) features will be enabled for use.

Detail Information:

  • Key = sysGmsFeatureSet

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 All - Full Set of GMS Features  1 
 Restricted - Fixed Minimal Set of GMS Features  2 
 Profiled - Selected Subset of GMS Features  3 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

GMS Profile

   System Configuration  >  GMS Configuration

Select the Google Mobile Services (GMS) profile to enable.

  • If the value Chrome Browser is selected, Chrome Browser will be enabled for use.

  • If the value Google Maps is selected, Google Maps will be enabled for use.

  • If the value Firebase Cloud Messaging is selected, Firebase Cloud Messaging will be enabled for use.

  • If the value Combination of Chrome and Maps and FCM is selected, Combination of Chrome, Maps and FCM will be enabled for use.

Detail Information:

  • Key = sysGmsProfile

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Chrome Browser  1 
 Google Maps  2 
 Firebase Cloud Messaging  3 
 Combination of Chrome and Maps and FCM  4 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.3.

Lifeguard Configuration

   System Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Update Mode, UI Control, Update Over Cellular, OTA Options, File-Based Update Source, File-Based Update Options, File-Based Update Local Path And Name, and Streaming

The following defined terms are important to understand:

Zebra LifeGuard

Zebra LifeGuard refers to Zebra’s LifeGuardTM for AndroidTM program that offers OS Updates for Zebra Android devices. Fore more information on the LifeGuard (LG) program, see the LifeGuard FAQ.

OS Update

An OS Update is the process or act of patching or replacing the Operating System (OS) software image of a Zebra Android device. OS Updates supported by Zebra LifeGuard can include OS Upgrades and, in some cases, OS Downgrades.

OS Upgrade

An OS Upgrade can provide security-only updates, maintenance releases (including features and fixes) and baseline and Android-version updates and generally changes the device to have a newer (higher) OS Version.

OS Downgrade

An OS Downgrade can remove security-only updates or maintenance releases (including features and fixes) or return a device to an earlier baseline or Android-version and generally changes the device to have a older (lower) OS Version. In most cases, an OS Downgrade also initiates a mandatory Data Wipe of Primary Storage to ensure that data is not placed at risk by the removal of security fixes that were protecting the data prior to the OS Downgrade.

OS Version

An OS Version is a string, also sometimes referred to as a Build ID, that uniquely identifies a particular Operating System (OS) software image for a Zebra Android device. A successful OS Update that applies a new software image will ALWAYS result in a change of the OS Version reported by the device.

Zebra LifeGuard OTA Server

The Zebra LifeGuard OTA Server is an Internet-hosted server that enables remote initiation of OS Updates on Internet-connected Zebra Android devices when using the Fully Automatic or EMM Controlled modes.

Zebra LifeGuard OTA Service

The Zebra LifeGuard OTA Service is a software component that is built-into Zebra Android devices and communicates with the Zebra LifeGuard OTA Server to allow it to remotely initiate OS Updates on the device. Use of this service requires the service to be enabled and requires device network connectivity over which the Zebra LifeGuard OTA Server on the Internet can be reached. Fore more information on the Zebra LifeGuard OTA Service, see Device Update.

Zebra LifeGuard Update Files

A Zebra LifeGuard Update File is a ZIP-format file released by Zebra. These files can be leveraged by the Zebra LifeGuard OTA Server and the Zebra LifeGuard OTA Service when performing Fully Automatic or EMM Controlled OS Updates or can be manually downloaded and used to perform File-Based Updates OS Updates.

Local Update Files

A Local Update File is a Zebra LifeGuard Update File that is downloaded in advance, using any available means, stored in the Device File System and then used to initiate File-Based Updates. Using Zebra Local Update Files can increase the reliability of OS Updates as well as allowing deferred initiation at a time when network connectivity may be unavailable, at the expense of occupying, at least temporarily, a potentially significant amount of Device File System space.

Streamed Update Files

A Streamed Update File is a Zebra LifeGuard Update File that is downloaded on demand when File-Based Updates are initiated and never needs to be stored in the Device File System. Using Streamed Update Files avoids the need to have sufficient Device File System space to hold potentially large files to initiate OS Updates, but increases the risk that network connectivity loss during the OS Update could cause the OS Update to fail. The use of Streamed Update Files is only allowed for Zebra LifeGuard Update Files that support A/B Mode due to the risks associated with failures due to network connectivity loss.

A/B Mode

A/B Mode is a mode wherein an OS Update can be performed by installing the new OS into the B partition while the device is running in the A partition. This allows the OS Update to be performed safely while the device is in use because the current OS being run from the A partition is not affected. When the OS Update is completed successfully, a device reboot is required to activate the new OS in the B partition. If the new OS is successfully activated, then the partitions are swapped so the next OS Update in A/B Mode will replace the prior OS. If the new OS cannot be successfully activated, the current OS will be retained, preventing any loss of operability. A/B Mode is sometimes also referred to as "Seamless Update" because the bulk of the processing can be performed in the background with minimal impact on User workflow. Sometime after the completion of an OS Update performed in A/B Mode, a reboot is required, but this reboot could be delayed until a time when it will little or no impact on User workflow.

Zebra StageNow

Zebra StageNow is Zebra's Android device Staging (configuration and deployment) solution, which simplifies the local initiation of OS Updates in File-Based Updates mode.

Zebra Recovery Mode

Zebra Recovery Mode is a special mode into which Zebra Android devices can be booted that enables a User to manually initiate OS Updates in File-Based Updates mode using Local Update Files. Zebra Recovery Mode is also used when OS Updates are remotely initiated using Zebra LifeGuard Update Files that DO NOT support A/B Mode. In such cases, the device will reboot into Zebra Recovery Mode when the OS Update is initiated, the OS Update will be performed in Zebra Recovery Mode, then the device will reboot into the new, updated, OS. .

Detail Information:

  • Key = fotaConfig

  • Type = bundle

Update Mode

   System Configuration  >  Lifeguard Configuration

Select how OS Updates will be initiated on the device.

  • If the value Fully Automatic is selected, then Zebra LifeGuard OTA Service will be enabled and configured to automatically update the device whenever a suitable new Zebra LifeGuard Update File is published by Zebra. Use of this mode requires device network connectivity over which the Zebra LifeGuard OTA Server on the Internet can be reached. Standard data rates apply for metered connections.

  • If the value EMM Controlled is selected, then Zebra LifeGuard OTA Service will be enabled but configured to NOT automatically update the OS even if a suitable new OS is published by Zebra. A LifeGuard OTA-integrated EMM can be used to control when/if OS Updates are initiated remotely on devices and which Zebra LifeGuard Update Files are used. Use of this mode requires device network connectivity over which the EMM Server can be reached and over which Zebra LifeGuard OTA Server can be reached. Standard data rates apply for metered connections.

  • If the value File-Based Updates is selected, then Zebra LifeGuard OTA Service will be disabled. File-Based Update Options can be specified to initiate OS Updates or OS Updates may be manually initiated on a device by the User using Zebra StageNow or Zebra Recovery Mode.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fotaUpdateMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Fully Automatic  1 
 EMM Controlled  2 
 File-Based Updates  3 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.1.

UI Control

   System Configuration  >  Lifeguard Configuration

Select whether the User can change Zebra LifeGuard OTA Service settings.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to use UI to modify Zebra LifeGuard OTA Service settings.

  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to use UI to modify Zebra LifeGuard OTA Service settings.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fotaUserControlOfSettings

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 9.1.

Update Over Cellular

   System Configuration  >  Lifeguard Configuration

Select whether Full Automatic LifeGuard updates can occur over Cellular (metered) networks.

  • If the value On is selected, the User will use the cellular (metered) network to download the update.

  • If the value Off is selected, the User will use an unmetered network to download the update.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fotaUpdateOverCellular

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.1.

OTA Options

   System Configuration  >  Lifeguard Configuration

Enter one or more optional parameters to configure or adjust the behavior of the Zebra LifeGuard OTA Service.

Note: This feature is reserved for future use and no valid supported options currently exist. It is therefore recommended to leave this MC empty until future notice.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fotaOptions

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: Future Use.

File-Based Update Source

   System Configuration  >  Lifeguard Configuration

Select the Source for the Zebra LifeGuard Update File to be used to initiate an OS Update when File-Based Updates is specified for Update Mode.

  • If the value Local Update File is selected, then an OS Update, if initiated, will use a Local Update File, whose path and file name must be specified in File-Based Update Local Path And Name, and which must already be present in the Device File System for the OS Update to occur.

  • If the value Streamed Update File is selected, then an * OS Update, if initiated, will use a *Streamed Update File, information about which must be specified in Streaming Configuration, and which must be present and reachable by the device over a suitable network for the OS Update to occur.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fotaConfigUpdateFileSource

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Local Update File  1 
 Streamed Update File  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

File-Based Update Options

   System Configuration  >  Lifeguard Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more File-Based Update Option(s) when File-Based Updates is specified for Update Mode.

To initiate File-Based Updates, one or more File-Based Update Options must be specified to identify the condition(s) under which OS Updates will be initiated. This is necessary because File-Based Updates could be initiated at any time and it would generally be undesirable to repeat the initiation of an OS Update that has already been successfully completed because it would put unnecessary load on the device and could negatively impact User workflow (e.g., by rebooting, etc.).

Note: It is allowable to use any combination of File-Based Update Options together, in which case an OS Update will ONLY be performed if the conditions associated with ALL specified options are met.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fotaUpdateOptions

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

File-Based Update Option

   System Configuration  >  Lifeguard Configuration  >  File-Based Update Options

Use this Sub-group to configure File-Based Update Option Type and Mismatch Version.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fotaUpdateOption

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

File-Based Update Option Type

   System Configuration  >  Lifeguard Configuration  >  File-Based Update Options  >  File-Based Update Option

Select the Type of a single File-Based Update Option relating to how/when a Zebra LifeGuard Update File will be used to initiate an OS Update. when File-Based Updates is specified for Update Mode.

  • If the value Reboot Count Unchanged is selected, then an OS Update will be initiated when the value is set if the device has not rebooted since this value was first set and if the other requisite values for File Update are also specified. This Option assumes that a reboot will be performed as result of any OS Update (successful or unsuccessful) and hence that once the device has been rebooted, there would be no value in repeating the OS Update.

  • If the value Version Mismatch is selected, then an OS Update will be initiated when the value is set if the device reports a different OS Version for its current OS from that specified in Mismatch Version and if the other requisite values for File Update are also specified. This Option assumes that the administrator has properly determined the OS Version that will be present on the device once the Zebra LifeGuard Update File is applied and has accurately specified that OS Version value. The OS Version that will be present on the device once a Zebra LifeGuard Update File is applied to a device will be provided along with the Zebra LifeGuard Update File where it is posted by Zebra on the Internet. If an incorrect OS Version is specified, then it will likely never match the version reported by the device after performing the OS Update and could lead to repeated attempts to update the OS on the device.

Note: It is allowable to use any combination of File-Based Update Options together, in which case an OS Update will ONLY be performed if the conditions associated with ALL specified options are met.

Note: When using File-Based Update Options to perform an OS Update using a Zebra LifeGuard Update File, File-Based Update Source must also be specified to identify the Source from which the Zebra LifeGuard Update File will be acquired to perform the OS Update.

  • If the value Local Update File is selected for File-Based Update Source, then File-Based Update Local Path And Name must also be specified to provide the path and file name of the Local Update File, which must already be present in the Device File System, to be used to perform the OS Update.

  • If the value Streamed Update File is selected for File-Based Update Source, then Streaming Configuration must also be specified to provide the information required to Stream the Streamed Update File to perform the OS Update.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fotaUpdateOptionType

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Reboot Count Unchanged  1 
 Version Mismatch  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Mismatch Version

   System Configuration  >  Lifeguard Configuration  >  File-Based Update Options  >  File-Based Update Option

Enter the OS Version that will be reported by the device once the Zebra LifeGuard Update File is applied to the device. This is used to determine if the device current reports a different OS Version and hence needs to initiate an OS Update using the Zebra LifeGuard Update File to bring the device to the desired OS.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fotaUpdateOptionTypeMismatchVersion

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

File-Based Update Local Path And Name

   System Configuration  >  Lifeguard Configuration

Enter the Path and File Name in the Device File System of a Local Update File to use to initiate an OS Update, when the value File-Based Updates is selected for Update Mode.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fotaConfigLocalFilePathAndName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.1.

Streaming Configuration

   System Configuration  >  Lifeguard Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Source URL, Authorization Type, Zebra Authentication Token, Username, Password, and Custom Authentication Header when File-Based Updates is specified for Update Mode and Streamed Update File is specified for File-Based Update Source.

To initiate an OS Update using File-Based Updates and a Streamed Update File, it is necessary to specify the source location from which the Streamed Update File will be acquired. It is also be necessary to specify information about the form of Authentication that will be used to authorize access to it. The following types of Authentication are supported when acquiring a Streamed Update File:

  • No Authorization is used when the URI specified for the source location from which the Streamed Update File will be acquired requires no authentication to authorize access.

  • Zebra Authentication Token is used when the URI specified for the source location from which the Streamed Update File is aZebra Internet Repository and therefore requires a Zebra Authentication Token issued by Zebra to be specified to authorize access.

  • Basic Authentication is used when the URI specified for the source location from which the Streamed Update File is a Repository that uses Basic Authentication and therefore requires a Username and Password to be specified to authorize access.

  • Custom Authorization Header is used when the URI specified for the source location from which the Streamed Update File is a Repository that uses some other form of Authentication and therefore requires a Custom Authentication Header to be specified to authorize access. .

Detail Information:

  • Key = fotaStreamingConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.0.

Source URL

   System Configuration  >  Lifeguard Configuration  >  Streaming Configuration

Enter a URL via which a Streamed Update File can be accessed, when needed, to initiate an OS Update. This could be an Internet or Intranet URL, and might require some form of Authentication" to authorize access to it. The *Authentication required to authorize access to the Streamed Update File must also be specified via Authorization Type.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fotaStreamingConfigSourcerUrl

  • Type = string

Authorization Type

   System Configuration  >  Lifeguard Configuration  >  Streaming Configuration

Select the Type of Authentication required to authorize access to the Streamed Update File that will be used to initiate an OS Update.

  • If the value No Authorization is selected, no Authentication will be used to authorize access to the Streamed Update File and you do not need to specify any additional information.

  • If the value Zebra Authentication Token is selected, then Zebra Authentication will be used to authorize access to the Streamed Update File and therefore you must also specify Zebra Authentication Token.

  • If the value Basic Authentication is selected, then Basic Authentication will be used to authorize access to the Streamed Update File and therefore you must also specify Username and Password.

  • If the value Custom Authorization Header is selected, then Custom Authentication will be used to authorize access to the Streamed Update File and therefore you must also specify Custom Authentication Header.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fotaStreamingConfigAuthType

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 No Authorization  0 
 Zebra Authentication Token  1 
 Basic Authentication  2 
 Custom Authorization Header  3 

Zebra Authentication Token

   System Configuration  >  Lifeguard Configuration  >  Streaming Configuration

Enter the Zebra-issued Authentication token required to authorize access to the Streamed Update File to be used to initiate an OS Update when Zebra Authentication Token is specified for Authorization Type.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fotaStreamingConfigZebraAuthToken

  • Type = string

Username

   System Configuration  >  Lifeguard Configuration  >  Streaming Configuration

Enter the Username required to authorize access to the Streamed Update File to be used to initiate an OS Update when Basic Authentication is specified for Authorization Type.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fotaStreamingConfigUserName

  • Type = string

Password

   System Configuration  >  Lifeguard Configuration  >  Streaming Configuration

Enter the Password required to authorize access to the Streamed Update File to be used to initiate an OS Update when Basic Authentication is specified for Authorization Type.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fotaStreamingConfigPassword

  • Type = string

Custom Authentication Header

   System Configuration  >  Lifeguard Configuration  >  Streaming Configuration

Enter the Custom Authentication Header value required to authorize access to the Streamed Update File to be used to initiate an OS Update when Custom Authorization Header is specified for Authorization Type.

Detail Information:

  • Key = fotaStreamingConfigCustomAuthHeader

  • Type = string

Power Configuration

   System Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Auto Control, Battery, Battery Charge Mode, Maximum Battery Charge, Battery Charge Schedules, Heaters, Ports Power, and Doze Mode State.

Detail Information:

  • Key = powerConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Auto Control Configuration

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure State, On Mode, Off Mode, and Off Timeout.

Detail Information:

  • Key = autoControlConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 7.1.

State

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration  >  Auto Control Configuration

Select whether device power will be automatically controlled.

  • If the value Off is selected, the device power will NOT be automatically controlled.

  • If the value On is selected, the device power will be automatically controlled and you should also specify one or more of Off Mode, to specify whether/how device power will automatically be turned off or On Mode, to specify whether/how device power will automatically be turned on.

Detail Information:

  • Key = autoPowerState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do Not Change   
 Off  0 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

On Mode

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration  >  Auto Control Configuration

Select whether and how device power will be automatically turned on as part of automatic power control when Off Timeout is specified:

  • If the value Never is selected, the device power will NOT automatically turn on when the ignition turns on.

  • If the value When Ignition is Turned On is selected, the device power will automatically turn on whenever the ignition turns on.

Detail Information:

  • Key = autoPowerOnMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Never  0 
 When Ignition is Turned On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Off Mode

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration  >  Auto Control Configuration

Select whether and how device power will be automatically turned off as part of automatic power control when Auto Power Control is specified.

  • If the value Never is selected, the device power will NOT automatically turn off when the ignition turns off.

  • If the value When Ignition is Turned Off is selected, the device power will automatically turn off whenever the ignition turns off.

Detail Information:

  • Key = autoPowerOffMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Never  0 
 When Ignition is Turned Off  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Off Timeout

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration  >  Auto Control Configuration

Enter the timeout that will be in effect before device power is automatically turned off as part of automatic power control, when the value On is selected for State is specified and the value When Ignition is Turned Off is selected for Off Mode.

A value of 0 will leave the existing timeout unchanged.

Detail Information:

  • Key = autoPowerOffTimeout

  • Type = integer

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Battery Configuration

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Critical Low Threshold, Decommission Percentage Threshold, Decommission Usage Threshold, Saver Control Mode, Saver Mode Percentage Threshold, Saver State, and User Control of Saver.

Detail Information:

  • Key = batteryConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Critical Low Threshold

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration  >  Battery Configuration

Enter the threshold battery level below which the battery is deemed to be critically low.

  • The Default Value is 4, which causes the battery to be deemed critical low when the battery level dips below 4% remaining capacity.

  • If the value 0 is entered, the currently configured critically low threshold will not be changed, which is functionally equivalent to not specifying a value.

  • If a value from 1 through 25 is entered, the critically low threshold will be set to the specified value.

Detail Information:

  • Key = batteryCriticalLowThreshold

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.3.

Decommission Percentage Threshold

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration  >  Battery Configuration

Enter the percentage of remaining battery capacity below which the battery will be deemed ready for decommissioning.

Detail Information:

  • Key = batteryDecommissionPercentageThreshold

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.4.

Decommission Usage Threshold

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration  >  Battery Configuration

Enter the amount of battery usage (e.g. charge/discharge cycles, coulombs in/out, etc.) that can occur before the battery will be deemed ready for Decommissioning.

Detail Information:

  • Key = batteryDecommissionUsageThreshold

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.4.

Saver Control Mode

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration  >  Battery Configuration

Select how Battery Saver Mode will be controlled.

  • If the value Manually is selected, the device will NOT Automatically, and will activate Battery Saver Mode only when specifically requested by the User or by specifying the value On for Saver State.

  • If the value Automatically is selected, the device WILL Automatically activate Battery Saver Mode and Saver Mode Percentage Threshold must also be specified to provide the threshold battery level percentage below which the device will Automatically activate Battery Saver Mode.

Detail Information:

  • Key = powerBatterySaverControlMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do Not Change   
 Manually  2 
 Automatically  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.1.

Saver Mode Percentage Threshold

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration  >  Battery Configuration

Enter the Battery Level percentage below which Battery Saver Mode will automatically turned On, when Automatically is specified for Saver Control Mode.

Detail Information:

  • Key = powerBatterySaverModePercentage

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.1.

Saver State

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration  >  Battery Configuration

Select the Battery Saver State.

  • If the value Off is selected, Battery Saver State will be turned Of.

  • If the value On is selected, Battery Saver State will be turned On.

Detail Information:

  • Key = powerBatterySaverState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: TBD.

User Control of Saver

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration  >  Battery Configuration

Select whether the User will be allowed to control the State of Battery Saver Mode via UI on the device.

  • If the value Disable is selected, then the User will NOT be allowed to control the State of Battery Saver Mode via UI on the device.

  • If the value Enable is selected, then the User will be allowed to control the State of Battery Saver Mode via UI on the device.

Detail Information:

  • Key = powerBatteryUserControlSaver

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disable  2 
 Enable  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.2.

Battery Charge Mode

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration

Select battery charge mode.

  • If the value System default is selected, then the standard Android battery charging mechanisms will be used.

  • If the value Set maximum charge is selected, then the battery will be charged until it reaches the value specified in Maximum Battery Charge

Detail Information:

  • Key = powerBatteryChargeMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 System default  1 
 Set maximum charge  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.6.

Maximum Battery Charge

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration

Enter the maximum battery charge percentage (between 65 and 100) at which charging will stop, when !!2@powerBatteryChargeMode!! is specified for Battery Charge Mode

Detail Information:

  • Key = powerBatteryMaximumCharge

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.6.

Battery Charge Schedules

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Schedule(s).

Detail Information:

  • Key = pBChargeSchedules

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Android 11.

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.6.

Schedule

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration  >  Battery Charge Schedules

Use this Sub-group to configure Target Day and Target Time.

Detail Information:

  • Key = pBCSchedule

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Android 11.

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.6.

Target Day

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration  >  Battery Charge Schedules  >  Schedule

Select the day to have the battery fully charged.

Detail Information:

  • Key = pBCSDay

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Monday  1 
 Tuesday  2 
 Wednesday  3 
 Thursday  4 
 Friday  5 
 Saturday  6 
 Sunday  7 

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Android 11.

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.6.

Target Time

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration  >  Battery Charge Schedules  >  Schedule

Select the time to have the battery fully charged.

Detail Information:

  • Key = pBCSTime

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Android 11.

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.6.

Heaters

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Heater(s).

Detail Information:

  • Key = heaters

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Oreo and Pie.

  • Supported on Device(s): VC80X and VC8300.

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 9.1.

  • Support discontinued from: MX 9.0.

Heater

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration  >  Heaters

Use this Sub-group to configure Type, Off Threshold, and On Threshold.

Detail Information:

  • Key = heater

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Oreo and Pie.

  • Supported on Device(s): VC80X and VC8300.

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Support discontinued from: MX 9.0.

Type

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration  >  Heaters  >  Heater

Select the Type of Heater.

  • If the value Serial I/O is selected, the Heater that warms the Serial I/O Port of the device will be selected.

  • If the value USB I/O is selected, the Heater that warms the USB I/O Port of the device will be selected.

  • If the value Battery is selected, the Heater that warms the Battery of the device will be selected.

  • If the value Touch Panel is selected, the Heater that warms the Touch Panel of the device will be selected.

  • If the value Keyboard is selected, the Heater that warms the Keyboard of the device will be selected.

  • If the value Scanner Window is selected, the Heater that warms the Scanner Window of the device will be selected.

Detail Information:

  • Key = heaterType

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Serial I/O  1 
 USB I/O  2 
 Battery  3 
 Touch Panel  4 
 Keyboard  5 
 Scanner Window  6 

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Oreo and Pie.

  • Supported on Device(s): VC80X and VC8300.

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Off Threshold

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration  >  Heaters  >  Heater

Select the temperature above which a specified Heater should automatically turn OFF.

Detail Information:

  • Key = heaterOffThreshold

  • Type = integer

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Oreo and Pie.

  • Supported on Device(s): VC80X and VC8300.

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

On Threshold

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration  >  Heaters  >  Heater

Select the temperature below which a specified Heater should automatically turn ON.

Detail Information:

  • Key = heaterOnThreshold

  • Type = integer

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Oreo and Pie.

  • Supported on Device(s): VC80X and VC8300.

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Ports Power

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Port Power(s).

Detail Information:

  • Key = portsPower

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Oreo and Pie.

  • Supported on Device(s): VC80X and VC8300.

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 7.1.

  • Support discontinued from: MX 9.0.

Port Power

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration  >  Ports Power

Use this Sub-group to configure Power Port Type.

Detail Information:

  • Key = portPower

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Oreo and Pie.

  • Supported on Device(s): VC80X and VC8300.

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Support discontinued from: MX 9.0.

Power Port Type

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration  >  Ports Power  >  Port Power

Select a Port Type for which the Output Power State will be specified.

  • If the value Serial Port 1 is selected, the the Output Power State will be specified for the first Serial Port.

  • If the value Serial Port 2 is selected, the Output Power State will be specified for the second device Serial Port.

  • If the value USB Port 2 is selected, the Output Power State will be specified for second device USB Port.

Detail Information:

  • Key = sysPowerPortType

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Serial Port 1  1 
 Serial Port 2  2 
 USB Port 2  3 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Doze Mode State

   System Configuration  >  Power Configuration

Select whether Doze Mode should be turned On or Off for the entire device.

  • If the value Off is selected, the device will never enter Doze Mode for any applications.

  • If the value On is selected, the device will will enter Doze Mode for various applications based on the normal Android rules for Doze Mode.

Detail Information:

  • Key = sysPowerDozeModeState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 7.2.

Remote Scanner Configurations

   System Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Remote Scanner Configuration.

Detail Information:

  • Key = remoteScannerConfigs

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 5.2.

Remote Scanner Configuration

   System Configuration  >  Remote Scanner Configurations

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Remote Scanner(s).

Detail Information:

  • Key = remoteScannerConfig

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Remote Scanner

   System Configuration  >  Remote Scanner Configurations  >  Remote Scanner Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Config File, Scanner Serial Number, and Update File.

Detail Information:

  • Key = remoteScanner

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Config File

   System Configuration  >  Remote Scanner Configurations  >  Remote Scanner Configuration  >  Remote Scanner

Enter the path and file name of a configuration file, which must exist at the specified location in the device file system, from which configuration should be applied to the specified Remote Scanner.

Detail Information:

  • Key = remoteScannerConfigFile

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 5.2.

Scanner Serial Number

   System Configuration  >  Remote Scanner Configurations  >  Remote Scanner Configuration  >  Remote Scanner

Enter the Serial Number of the Remote Scanner to be affected.

Detail Information:

  • Key = remoteScannerSerialNumber

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 5.2.

Update File

   System Configuration  >  Remote Scanner Configurations  >  Remote Scanner Configuration  >  Remote Scanner

Enter the path and file name of an Update File to be applied.

Detail Information:

  • Key = remoteScannerUpdateFile

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 5.2.

Wake-Up Configuration

   System Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Wake-Up All Sources State, Wake-Up Method, and Wake-Up Sources.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wakeupConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Wake-Up All Sources State

   System Configuration  >  Wake-Up Configuration

Select whether all Wake-Up Sources should be collectively turned On or Off.

  • If the value Off is selected, then all Wake-Up Sources will be turned Off (will NOT Wake-Up the Display).

  • If the value On is selected, then all Wake-Up Sources will be turned On (will Wake-Up the Display).

Detail Information:

  • Key = wakeupAllSourcesState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.0.

Wake-Up Method

   System Configuration  >  Wake-Up Configuration

Select the Method that will be used to identify Wake-up Sources to be controlled.

  • If the value Use Hardware Signals for Wake-Up is selected, Wake-Up Sources will be Key Identifiers for Hardware Signals related to Physical Keys.

  • If the value Use Software (Mappable Keycodes) for Wake-Up is selected, Wake-Up Sources will be Key Identifiers for Software Remappable Keys.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wakeupMethod

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Use Hardware Signals for Wake-Up  1 
 Use Software (Mappable Keycodes) for Wake-Up  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 9.2.

Wake-Up Sources

   System Configuration  >  Wake-Up Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Wake-Up Source(s).

Detail Information:

  • Key = powerWakeupSources

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 9.3.

Wake-Up Source

   System Configuration  >  Wake-Up Configuration  >  Wake-Up Sources

Use this Sub-group to configure Key Identifier and Custom Key Identifier.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wakeupSource

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Key Identifier

   System Configuration  >  Wake-Up Configuration  >  Wake-Up Sources  >  Wake-Up Source

Select the Key Identifier to be used to identify the Wake-Up Source to be controlled.

  • If the value L1 Button is selected, the First (Topmost) Button located on the Left side of the device will be the identified Wake-Up Source.

  • If the value L2 Button is selected, the Second (Down from the top) Button located on the Left side of the device will be the identified Wake-Up Source.

  • If the value R1 Button is selected, the First (Topmost) Button located on the Right side of the device will be the identified Wake-Up Source.

  • If the value R2 Button is selected, the Second (Down from the top) Button located on the Right side of the device will be the identified Wake-Up Source.

  • If the value Grip (Gun) Trigger is selected, the Trigger on the Grip (Gun Handle) will be the identified Wake-Up Source.

  • If the value Rear Button is selected, the Button located on the Rear of the device will be the identified Wake-Up Source.

  • If the value Custom is selected, a Custom Button will be the identified Wake-Up Source.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wakeupKeyId

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Button L1  BUTTON_L1 
 Button L2  BUTTON_L2 
 Button R1  BUTTON_R1 
 Button R2  BUTTON_R2 
 Grip (Gun) Trigger  GUN_TRIGGER 
 Rear Button  REAR_BUTTON 
 Custom  Custom 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Custom Key Identifier

   System Configuration  >  Wake-Up Configuration  >  Wake-Up Sources  >  Wake-Up Source

Enter the custom Key Identifier that identifies the Wake-Up Source to be controlled.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wakeupCustomKeyId

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Pass-Through Command

   System Configuration

Enter XML to be Passed-Through by OEMConfig to a lower-level processing module.

Notes:

  • To ensure successful OEMConfig pass-through, all XML MUST be sent as clear text. Inclusion of ANY encrypted value results in failure. To avoid potential security risks, use caution when sending sensitive data as clear text.

Detail Information:

  • Key = passThroughCommand

  • Type = string

Logs Configuration

   System Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Background Collection State, Logging Level, Upload When Logging Turned Off, Upload Snapshots URI, Control Secure Logging, and Control Secure Logging Password.

Detail Information:

  • Key = logsConfig

  • Type = bundle

Background Collection State

   System Configuration  >  Logs Configuration

Select the Log Action to be performed.

  • If the value Start Background Collection is selected, then the Log Management subsystem will Start Background Collection of Log Files. To ensure that Log File content required for troubleshooting is available, Background Collection of Log Files should be Started well before the occurrence of an event of interest to ensure that when the Log Files are acquired, they will contain information concerning that event.

  • If the value Stop Background Collection is selected, then the Log Management subsystem will Stop Background Collection of Log Files. Since Background Collection of Log Files can consume significant system resources, it is best to Stop Background Collection of Log Files when troubleshooting is completed and collection of Log Files is no longer required.

Detail Information:

  • Key = backgroundCollectionState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  0 
 On  1 

Logging Level

   System Configuration  >  Logs Configuration

Select the Level of Logging to be performed.

  • If the value Basic is selected, then the Log Management subsystem will be configured to collect Kernel and Logcat log data.

  • If the value Basic+Qxdm is selected, then the Log Management subsystem will be configured to collect Kernel, Logcat and Qxdm log data. Qxdm log data is only supported on WAN (Cellular) devices.

  • If the value Basic+TCP Dump is selected, then the Log Management subsystem will be configured to collect Kernel, Logcat and TCP Dump log data.

Since Background Collection of Log Files can consume significant system resources, it is best to select the minimum level of Logcat logging that will serve the need. When unsure, it may be advisable to start with lowest level and work up to higher levels if needed.

Detail Information:

  • Key = logsCollectionConfigurationLogLevel

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Basic  [binary data] 
 Basic+Qxdm  [binary data] 
 Basic+TCP Dump  [binary data] 

Upload When Logging Turned Off

   System Configuration  >  Logs Configuration

Select whether to upload logs to the specified URI when logging is turned off.

  • If the value No is selected, then when logging is turned off, no logs will be uploaded.

  • If the value Yes is selected, then when logging is turned off, logs will be sent to the URI defined in Upload Snapshots URI

Detail Information:

  • Key = logsCollectionConfigurationUploadWhenOff

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 No  0 
 Yes  1 

Upload Snapshots URI

   System Configuration  >  Logs Configuration

Enter the URI of a location on a Remote Server to which all Snapshot Files previously Created on-device, and which have not yet been Uploaded, will be Uploaded.

  • Snapshot Files will be Uploaded to the Remote Server in the order they were Created on-device (oldest to newest).

  • Each Snapshot File will be automatically deleted from the device once it has been successfully Uploaded to the Remote Server.

The specified URI MUST start with a Protocol Specification that indicates which file transfer protocol should be used to Upload the Snapshot File. The following are supported:

  • FTP:// - The (insecure) File Transfer Protocol (FTP) protocol will be used to Upload the Snapshot File.

  • FTPS:// - The (secure) File Transfer Protocol over SSL (FTPS) protocol will be used to Upload the Snapshot File.

The specified URI:

  • MAY contain authentication credentials that will be used to authenticate to the Remote Server before Uploading the Snapshot File.

  • MUST contain an IP address or domain name that identifies the Remote Server to which the Snapshot File will be Uploaded.

  • SHOULD typically contain path that identifies the location on the Remote Server, relative to the home folder of the default account or the account selected by the authentication credentials, to which the Snapshot File will be Uploaded.

  • MUST NOT contain a file name since the name of the file to which the Snapshot File will be Uploaded on the Remote Server will be automatically generated, as described below, to ensure that Snapshot Files from various devices, and created at various times, do not overwrite each other.

Each Snapshot File that is Uploaded to the Remote Server will be assigned an automatically generated unique file name of the format:

  • model-serial-date-time.zip.

The above format enables files Uploaded to the same folder on the Remote Server to be differentiated by the models and serial numbers of the devices that Uploaded them and by the date and time when the files were created on those devices.

  • For example: TC510K-17068522528997-01312020-132649.zip

Within the above example:

  • TC510K is the model identifier of the device that Uploaded the Snapshot File.

  • 17068522528997 is the serial number of the device that Uploaded the Snapshot File.

  • 01312020 is the date the Snapshot File was Created in the device, indicating January 31, 2020.

  • 132649 is the time the Snapshot File was Created in the device, indicating 1:26:49 PM.

Detail Information:

  • Key = logsUploadSnapshotsUri

  • Type = string

Control Secure Logging

   System Configuration  >  Logs Configuration

Select whether Secure RxLogger should be on or off

  • If the value Turn On is selected, then RxLogger will capture data in secure mode.

  • If the value Turn Off is selected, then RxLogger will not capture data in secure mode.

RxLogger Secure Mode performs all the operations as Unsecure Mode. However, secure mode limits access to the logs by requiring a password to protect the data in the logs.

Detail Information:

  • Key = logsCollectionConfigurationSecureRxLogger

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Turn On  true 
 Turn Off  false 

Control Secure Logging Password

   System Configuration  >  Logs Configuration

Enter the encrypted password to use for Secure RxLogger. Use Zebra's Data Encryption Tool to secure the password before pasting into this field.

Detail Information:

  • Key = logsCollectionConfigurationSecureRxLogPwd

  • Type = string


UI Configuration

Use this Group to configure Audio, DataWedge, Display, Event-Triggered Intents, General UI, Keyboard, Settings UI, Touch Panel, and Volume UI Profiles.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiConfig

  • Type = bundle

Audio Configuration

   UI Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Best Path Exclusions, Charging Sounds, Replication, Vibrate On Call, and Mute/Vibrate State.

Detail Information:

  • Key = audioConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Best Path Exclusions

   UI Configuration  >  Audio Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more -Best Path Exclusion(s).

Detail Information:

  • Key = acBestPathExclusions

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.1.

-Best Path Exclusion

   UI Configuration  >  Audio Configuration  >  Best Path Exclusions

Use this Sub-group to configure Device.

Detail Information:

  • Key = acBestPathExclusion

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.3.

Device

   UI Configuration  >  Audio Configuration  >  Best Path Exclusions  >  -Best Path Exclusion

Select the device to include on the Best Path Exclusion list

Detail Information:

  • Key = acBPEDevice

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Ignore  0 
 Wired Headset (3.5 mm)  2 
 USB Audio  3 
 Bluetooth A2DP Audio  4 
 HDMI Audio  5 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.3.

Charging Sounds

   UI Configuration  >  Audio Configuration

Select whether a Sounds will be played when the Charging state of the device changes.

  • If the value Do NOT Play is selected, no sound will be played when the Charging state of the device changes.
  • If the value Play is selected, a chime will play when the Charging state of the device changes.

Detail Information:

  • Key = audioChargingSounds

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Do NOT Play  2 
 Play  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 9.3.

Replication

   UI Configuration  >  Audio Configuration

Select whether headset audio will be replicated to the built-in device speaker.

  • If the value Do not replicate headset audio on built-in speaker is selected, headset audio will NOT be replicated to the built-in device speaker. This might be desirable in a situation where the device is being used in an area where routing audio to the built-in device speaker could be disruptive to others in the area.

  • If the value Replicate headset audio on built-in speaker is selected, headset audio WILL be replicated to the built-in device speaker. This might be desirable in a situation where the User may walk away from a vehicle mounted device and leave his headset in the vehicle while performing some task nearby. If an audible alert is also routed to the built-in device speaker, the User might still hear it.

Detail Information:

  • Key = audioReplication

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Do not replicate headset audio on built-in speaker  2 
 Replicate headset audio on built-in speaker  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 7.2.

Vibrate On Call

   UI Configuration  >  Audio Configuration

Select whether the device will vibrate on call.

  • If the value Never Vibrate is selected, the device will never vibrate for incoming calls.

  • If the value Always Vibrate is selected, the device will always vibrate for incoming calls.

  • if the value Vibrate First Then Ring Gradually is selected, the device will vibrate first and then the ringer will gradually increase in volume.

Detail Information:

  • Key = audioSetVibrateOnCallsOption

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Never Vibrate  1 
 Always Vibrate  2 
 Vibrate First Then Ring Gradually  3 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.1.

Mute/Vibrate State

   UI Configuration  >  Audio Configuration

Select the mute and vibrate behavior of a device.

  • If the value Mute without Vibrate is selected, the volume will be muted (made silent) and the device will NOT vibrate, permitting neither audible nor tactile alerts.

  • If the value Mute with Vibrate is selected, the volume will be muted (made silent) and the device will vibrate, permitting tactile but NOT audible alerts.

  • If the value Unmute without Vibrate is selected, the volume will be unmuted (made audible) and the device will NOT vibrate, permitting audible but not tactile alerts.

Detail Information:

  • Key = audioMuteVibrateState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Mute without Vibrate  1 
 Mute with Vibrate  2 
 Unmute without Vibrate  3 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.4.

DataWedge Configuration

   UI Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure APIs, Database File, Simulscan Template File, Automatic Database Import, and User Access to Configuration UI.

Detail Information:

  • Key = datawedgeConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

APIs Configuration

   UI Configuration  >  DataWedge Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Configuration Intent APIs, Import of DataWedge Database, Notification Intent APIs, Query Intent APIs, and Runtime Intent APIs.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dwApiConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Configuration Intent APIs

   UI Configuration  >  DataWedge Configuration  >  APIs Configuration

Select whether Access to the DataWedge Configuration Intent APIs will be controlled.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dwApiConfiguration

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Uncontrolled (default) - Allow use by all Applications  1 
 Controlled - Allow use only by Whitelisted Applications  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.1.

Import of DataWedge Database

   UI Configuration  >  DataWedge Configuration  >  APIs Configuration

Select whether applications will be allowed to programmatically import DataWedge Configuration Files using the DataWedge Intent API.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dwApiDatabaseImport

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 9.2.

Notification Intent APIs

   UI Configuration  >  DataWedge Configuration  >  APIs Configuration

Select whether Access to the DataWedge Notification Intent APIs will be controlled.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dwApiNotification

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Uncontrolled (default) - Allow use by all Applications  1 
 Controlled - Allow use only by Whitelisted Applications  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.1.

Query Intent APIs

   UI Configuration  >  DataWedge Configuration  >  APIs Configuration

Select whether Access to the DataWedge Query Intent APIs will be controlled.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dwApiQuery

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Uncontrolled (default) - Allow use by all Applications  1 
 Controlled - Allow use only by Whitelisted Applications  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.1.

Runtime Intent APIs

   UI Configuration  >  DataWedge Configuration  >  APIs Configuration

Select whether Access to the DataWedge Runtime Intent APIs will be controlled.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dwApiRuntime

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Uncontrolled (default) - Allow use by all Applications  1 
 Controlled - Allow use only by Whitelisted Applications  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.1.

Database File

   UI Configuration  >  DataWedge Configuration

Enter the path and file name of a valid full (datawedge.db) or partial (dwprofile_profilename.db) DataWedge Database file in the Device File System that should be imported to replace or merge with the current configuration of DataWedge.

Detail Information:

  • Key = datawedgeDatabaseFile

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 9.2.

Simulscan Template File

   UI Configuration  >  DataWedge Configuration

Enter the path and file name of a valid Simulscan template in the Device File System to be added or replaced via DataWedge.

Detail Information:

  • Key = datawedgeSimulscanTemplateFile

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.0.

Automatic Database Import

   UI Configuration  >  DataWedge Configuration

Select whether DataWedge will Allow Automatic importing of Database Files deployed to the DataWedge Autoimport Folder.

Detail Information:

  • Key = datawedgeAutoImport

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  0 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 9.2.

User Access to Configuration UI

   UI Configuration  >  DataWedge Configuration

Select whether device users will be permitted to Access the DataWedge configuration UI and hence to alter the configuration of DataWedge.

Detail Information:

  • Key = datawedgeUserAccessToConfigurationUi

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 9.2.

Display Configuration

   UI Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Force Activities Resizable, Blanking, Power, Secondary Display, and Size and Rotation.

Detail Information:

  • Key = displayConfig

  • Type = bundle

Force Activities Resizable

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration

Select whether the device display and secondary display will force activities to be treated as resizable even if not declared in the application manifest.

If All Activities Resizable is selected, all activities running on the device display and secondary display will be forced to be treated as resizable even if not declared in the application manifest.

Iif Follow Application Manifest is selected, activities will be treated as resizable only if declared to be resizable in the application manifest.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiDisplayForceActivitiesResizable

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 All Activities Resizable  1 
 Follow Application Manifest  2 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.5.

Blanking Configuration

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Mode, Signal, Debounce Delay, and Polarity.

Detail Information:

  • Key = blankingConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 7.1.

Mode

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration  >  Blanking Configuration

Select whether the device Display will be Allowed to automatically Blank (display nothing) on a device under certain conditions.

When a User is operating a motor vehicle with a vehicle-mounted device, it is often advisable, and sometimes mandatory, for safety or regulatory reasons, to prevent the User from interacting with the device or being distracted by the Display of the device, while the vehicle is in motion.

At present, this feature is supported ONLY on the Zebra VC80x vehicle-mounted Android device.

  • If the value Never Blank is selected, the device Display will NOT be Allowed to automatically Blank (display nothing).

  • If the value Blank When Triggered by Signal is selected, the device Display WILL be Allowed to automatically Blank (display nothing). The following must also be specified:

  • Signal to specify the signal that will be used to activate automatic Display Blanking.

  • Polarity to specify the polarity of the signal specified via Signal that will be used to activate automatic Blanking.

  • Debounce Delay to specify the time that will be used to debounce the signal specified via Signal.

Detail Information:

  • Key = blankingMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do Not Change   
 Never Blank  1 
 Blank When Triggered by Signal  2 

Support Information:

  • Supported on Device(s): VC8X.

Signal

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration  >  Blanking Configuration

Select the Signal that will be used to trigger automatic Display Blanking when the value Blank When Triggered by Signal is selected for Mode to turn on Display Blanking Mode.

  • If the value Input 1 is selected, on the Zebra VC80x vehicle-mounted Android device the Clear To Send (CTS) input signal on Serial Port 1 will be used to trigger automatic Display Blanking.
  • If the value Input 2 is selected, on the Zebra VC80x vehicle-mounted Android device the Clear To Send (CTS) input signal on Serial Port 2 will be used to trigger automatic Display Blanking.

A common configuration to support Display Blanking Mode would be to connect the Request to Send (RTS) output signal of the selected Serial Port to the Clear To Send (CTS) input signal on the same serial port, via a switch, such as one activated by the vehicle accelerator. When the switch is activated, the output RTS output signal would be fed back into the CTS input signal and detected to trigger automatic Display Blanking.

Detail Information:

  • Key = blankingModeSignal

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 No Signal   
 Input 1  1 
 Input 2  2 

Support Information:

  • Supported on Device(s): VC8X.

Debounce Delay

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration  >  Blanking Configuration

Enter the Debounce Delay that will be used for the Signal that will be used to trigger automatic Display Blanking when the value Blank When Triggered by Signal is selected for Mode to turn on Display Blanking Mode.

The value specified should be in milliseconds and will be used as a delay following a change in signal state for changing the state of Display Blanking. This is useful to avoid spurious or repetitive changes in Display Blanking state as a result of bounce or chatter on the signal used to trigger automatic Display Blanking. The value specified should be in the range of 250 milliseconds (one quarter of a second) to 32767 milliseconds (more than 32 seconds), which should be adequate to handle most situations.

1 second (1000) is used as the default if no value is entered.

Detail Information:

  • Key = blankingModeSignalDebounceDelay

  • Type = integer

Support Information:

  • Supported on Device(s): VC8X.

Polarity

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration  >  Blanking Configuration

Select the Polarity of the Signal that will be used to trigger automatic Display Blanking when the value Blank When Triggered by Signal is selected for Mode to turn on Display Blanking Mode.

  • If the value Blank screen when signal goes inactive (OFF) is selected, the automatic Display Blanking will occur when the specified signal is detected as going inactive (OFF). This choice would be used in specialized configurations where the signal to be used to trigger automatic Display Blanking has reverse polarity.
  • If the value Blank screen when signal goes active (ON) is selected, , the automatic Display Blanking will occur when the specified signal is detected as going active (ON). This is the most common choice for the common configuration of connecting RTS and CTS via a switch.

Detail Information:

  • Key = blankingModeSignalPolarity

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 No polarity   
 Blank screen when signal goes inactive (OFF)  2 
 Blank screen when signal goes active (ON)  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported on Device(s): VC8X.

Power Configuration

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Stay Awake, Timeout, Mode, and Brightness.

Detail Information:

  • Key = displayPowerConfig

  • Type = bundle

Stay Awake

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration  >  Power Configuration

Select whether the Display Power State will be forced to remain On whenever the device is connected to external power.

  • If the value Turn Off is selected, the Display Power State will NOT be forced to remain On whenever the device is connected to external power and hence the Display Power State MAY be Automatically turned Off, after a period of inactivity specified via Timeout.
  • If the value Turn On is selected, the Display Power State WILL be forced to remain On whenever the device is connected to external power and hence the Display Power State will NOT be Automatically turned Off, even after a period of inactivity specified via Timeout.

When a device is used in a specialized environment, such as in a vehicle-mounted cradle or in a desktop docking station, the device may be continuously receiving power, rather than running off its own internal battery. In such situations, it may desirable to keep the device awake all the time since little would be gained from allowing the Display Power State to be Automatically turned Off.

Detail Information:

  • Key = displayPowerStayAwake

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Turn On  15 
 Turn Off  0 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 7.2.

Timeout

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration  >  Power Configuration

Enter the Duration of inactivity (in seconds), after which the Display Power State will Automatically be turned Off.

A given device may not support all available Duration values. In the event that a selected Durationvalue is not supported on a given device, the smallest larger value that is supported will be used or, if no larger value is supported, the largest smaller value that is supported will be used.

Detail Information:

  • Key = displayPowerTimeout

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 15 seconds  15 
 30 seconds  30 
 1 minute  60 
 2 minutes  120 
 5 minutes  300 
 10 minutes  600 
 30 minutes  1800 
 Never  65535 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

Mode

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration  >  Power Configuration

Select how the Power State of the Display Backlight will be controlled.

  • If the value Manual is selected, the Power State of the Display Backlight will be controlled Manually by the User or by specifying Brightness.

  • If the value Automatic is selected, the Power State of the Display Backlight will be controlled Aautomatically, based on the Ambient Light Sensor.

Detail Information:

  • Key = displayPowerBrightnessMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Manual  2 
 Automatic  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Brightness

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration  >  Power Configuration

Enter the Backlight Brightness when the value Manual is selected for Mode or enter -1 to leave the setting unchanged.

Detail Information:

  • Key = displayPowerBrightness

  • Type = integer

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Secondary Display Configuration

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Resizable Windows, Secondary Display Mode, and Secondary Display Remote Control.

Detail Information:

  • Key = secondaryDisplayConfig

  • Type = bundle

Resizable Windows

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration  >  Secondary Display Configuration

Select whether the device display and secondary display will support resizable windows.

If Turn On is selected, the device display and secondary display will allow resizing of windows.

If Turn Off is selected, the device display and secondary display will NOT allow resizing of windows.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uisDCResizableWindows

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Turn On  1 
 Turn Off  2 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.5.

Secondary Display Mode

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration  >  Secondary Display Configuration

Select the mode to use for the secondary display.

If Present Independent Desktop is selected, the secondary display will present a desktop that is independent from the device screen.

If Mirror Device Screen is selected, the secondary display will present a duplicate (mirror) of the device screen.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uisDCDisplayMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Present Independent Desktop  1 
 Mirror Device Screen  2 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.5.

Secondary Display Remote Control

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration  >  Secondary Display Configuration

Select the display on which remote operations will be performed.

If Primary (Mobile) is selected, remote control operations will be performed on the primary (mobile) display

If Secondary (Desktop) is selected, remote control operations will be performed on the secondary (desktop) display

Detail Information:

  • Key = uisDCRemoteControl

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Primary (Mobile)  0 
 Secondary (Desktop)  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.1.

Size and Rotation Configuration

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Allowed Orientations, Locked Orientation Positions, Rotation Mode, Auto-Landscape External Display, Display Size, Font Size, and Lock Override Button.

Detail Information:

  • Key = sizeAndRotationConfig

  • Type = bundle

Allowed Orientations

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration  >  Size and Rotation Configuration

Select which orientations are permitted when auto rotation is active.

  • If All (0 90 180 270 degrees) is selected, all orientations are allowed.

  • If All except portrait inverted (180 degrees) is selected, all orientations except inverted portrait are allowed.

Detail Information:

  • Key = displayAllowedOrientations

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do Not Change   
 All (0 90 180 270 degrees)  1 
 All except portrait inverted (180 degrees)  2 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.5.

Locked Orientation Positions

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration  >  Size and Rotation Configuration

Select an orientation in which to lock the display when autorotation is turned off.

  • If Portrait (No rotation) is selected, portrait (no rotation) is locked.

  • If Landscape left (90 degrees) is selected, landscape left (90 degrees) is locked.

  • if Portrait inverted (180 degrees) is selected, portrait inverted (180 degrees) is locked.

  • if Landscape right (270 degrees) is selected, landscape right (270 degrees) is locked.

Detail Information:

  • Key = displayLockedOrientation

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Portrait (No rotation)  0 
 Landscape left (90 degrees)  1 
 Portrait inverted (180 degrees)  2 
 Landscape right (270 degrees)  3 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.5.

Rotation Mode

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration  >  Size and Rotation Configuration

Select how Display Rotation will be performed.

  • If the value Manual is selected, how Display Rotation will be performed Manually, by the User.

  • If the value Automatic is selected, how Display Rotation will be performed Automatically, based on the Accelerometer.

Detail Information:

  • Key = displayConfigRotationMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Manual  Manual 
 Automatic  Auto 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.1.

Auto-Landscape External Display

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration  >  Size and Rotation Configuration

Select whether the display will auto-rotate when the device is placed in a workstation cradle and display mirroring is used.

Detail Information:

  • Key = displayConfigAutoLandscape

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 On  1 
 Off  2 

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Pie.

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Display Size

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration  >  Size and Rotation Configuration

Select the system display size

Detail Information:

  • Key = displayConfigDisplaySize

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Small  SMALL 
 Default  DEFAULT 
 Large  LARGE 
 Larger  LARGER 
 Largest  LARGEST 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 9.2.

Font Size

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration  >  Size and Rotation Configuration

Select the system font size

Detail Information:

  • Key = displayConfigFontSize

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Small  0.85 
 Default  1.0 
 Large  1.15 
 Largest  1.3 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 9.2.

Lock Override Button

   UI Configuration  >  Display Configuration  >  Size and Rotation Configuration

Select whether the User is allowed to override the locked screen orientation.

  • If Enable is selected, the User is allowed to override the locked screen orientation.

  • if Disable is selected, the User is not allowed to override the locked screen orientation.

Detail Information:

  • Key = displayLockOverrideButton

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Enable  1 
 Disable  2 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.5.

Event-Triggered Intents

   UI Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Event-Triggered Intent(s).

Detail Information:

  • Key = eventTriggeredIntents

  • Type = bundle_array

Event-Triggered Intent

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents

Use this Sub-group to configure Type, Key Identifier, Intent Action, Intent Package Name, Intent Class Name, Intent Category, Intent Data URI, Intent File, Intent MIME Type, Intent Extras, Keep Device Awake, Method, Sensor Identifier, and Sensor Parameter.

Detail Information:

  • Key = eventTriggeredIntent

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.5.

Type

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent

Select the Mode of the Alert on a device.

  • If the value Long press on selected key is selected, then an Intent will be scheduled to be sent each time the Key specified as the Alert Button via Key Identifier is long pressed. You must also specify some or all of the following to define the Intent to be sent (refer to the application receiving the intent for the values to use):

    • Intent Action

    • Intent Package Name

    • Intent Class Name

    • Intent Category

    • Intent Data URI

    • Intent File

    • Intent MIME Type

    • Intent Extras

  • If the value Sensor triggered is selected, then an Intent will be scheduled to be sent each time the sensor specified via Sensor Identifier is triggered. You must also specify some or all of the following to define the Intent to be sent (refer to the application receiving the intent for the values to use):

    • Intent Action

    • Intent Package Name

    • Intent Class Name

    • Intent Category

    • Intent Data URI

    • Intent File

    • Intent MIME Type

    • Intent Extras

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiAlertType

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 None   
 Long press on selected key  2 
 Sensor triggered  4 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Key Identifier

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent

Select the Key Identifier of the Key that will be used as the Alert Button.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiAlertModeKeyIdentifier

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 None   
 0  0 
 1  1 
 2  2 
 3  3 
 4  4 
 5  5 
 6  6 
 7  7 
 8  8 
 9  9 
 A  A 
 B  B 
 C  C 
 D  D 
 E  E 
 F  F 
 G  G 
 H  H 
 I  I 
 J  J 
 K  K 
 L  L 
 M  M 
 N  N 
 O  O 
 P  P 
 Q  Q 
 R  R 
 S  S 
 T  T 
 U  U 
 V  V 
 W  W 
 X  X 
 Y  Y 
 Z  Z 
 .(Period)  DOT 
 , (Comma)  COMMA 
 (Star)  STAR 
 #(Pound)  POUND 
 F1  F1 
 F2  F2 
 F3  F3 
 F4  F4 
 F5  F5 
 F6  F6 
 F7  F7 
 F8  F8 
 F9  F9 
 F10  F10 
 F11  F11 
 F12  F12 
 Enter  ENTER 
 Up  UP 
 Down  DOWN 
 Left  LEFT 
 Right  RIGHT 
 Escape  ESC 
 Backspace  BACKSPACE 
 Space  SPACE 
 Return  RETURN 
 Clear  CLR 
 Field Exit  FIELD_EXIT 
 Alt  ALT 
 Control  CTRL 
 Shift  SHIFT 
 Blue  BLUE 
 Orange  ORANGE 
 Diamond  DIAMOND 
 Green Dot  GREEN 
 Red Dot  RED 
 Volume Up  VOLUMEUP 
 Volume Down  VOLUMEDOWN 
 Scan  SCAN 
 Grip Trigger  GRIP_TRIGGER 
 Grip Trigger 2  GRIP_TRIGGER_2 
 Button L1  LEFT_TRIGGER_1 
 Button L2  LEFT_TRIGGER_2 
 Button R1  RIGHT_TRIGGER_1 
 Button R2  RIGHT_TRIGGER_2 
 Left Trigger  LEFT_TRIGGER 
 Right Trigger  RIGHT_TRIGGER 
 Center Trigger  CENTER_TRIGGER 
 Gun Trigger  GUN_TRIGGER 
 Headset Button  HEADSET_HOOK 
 Back  BACK 
 Home  HOME 
 Menu  MENU 
 Recent  RECENT 
 Search  SEARCH 
 Keyboard Backlight  KEYLIGHT 
 Display Backlight  LAMP 
 Power  POWER 
 P1 Button  P1 
 P2 Button  P2 
 P3 Button  P3 
 P4 Button  P4 
 P5 Button  P5 
 P6 Button  P6 
 Rear Button  REAR_BUTTON 
 Left External Trigger  LEFT_EXTERNAL_TRIGGER 
 Right External Trigger  RIGHT_EXTERNAL_TRIGGER 
 Touch NAV_PAD  NAV_PAD 
 Macro 1  M1 
 Macro 2  M2 
 Macro 3  M3 
 Macro 4  M4 
 Macro 5  M5 
 Macro 6  M6 
 Brightness Up  BRIGHTNESSUP 
 Brightness Down  BRIGHTNESSDOWN 
 Keyboard  KEYBOARD 
 Keyboard Backlight Brightness Up  KEYLIGHTUP 
 Keyboard Backlight Brightness Down  KEYLIGHTDOWN 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Intent Action

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent

Enter the Android Intent Action to be sent in the Intent that will be sent when the specified Alert Button is long pressed or the sensor is triggered.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiAlertModeIntentAction

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Intent Package Name

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent

Enter the Android Package Name that identifies the Android Application to which an Intent will be sent when the specified Alert Button is long pressed.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiAlertModeIntentPackageName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Intent Class Name

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent

Enter the Android Class to which an Intent will be sent when the specified Alert Button is long pressed.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiAlertModeIntentClassName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Intent Category

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent

Enter an Android Intent Category for the Intent that will be sent when the specified Alert Button is long pressed or the sensor is triggered.

A category value is NOT mandatory to specify for an Android Intent. But a category value is commonly used to help identify the purpose of an Android Intent. This can be especially when the application or service to be invoked supports many functions, in which case many action values may be used to identify those functions and it may be useful to categorize those functions. In some cases, the same action value might be supported in more than one category. You will need to consult the documentation or developer of a given application or service to determine whether a category value is needed and, if so, which value will invoke the desired behavior.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiAlertModeIntentCategory

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Intent Data URI

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent

Enter a Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) that for the Intent that will be sent when the specified Alert Button is long pressed.

The URI specified could reference a local device resource (e.g. a file in the Device File System) or a remote resource (e.g. available via a network).

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiAlertModeIntentDataUri

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Intent File

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent

Enter a Path and File Name for a File stored in the Device File System for the Intent that will be sent when the specified Alert Button is long pressed.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiAlertModeIntentFile

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Intent MIME Type

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent

Enter a Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) Type for the Intent that will be sent when the specified Alert Button is long pressed.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiAlertModeIntentMimeType

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Intent Extras

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent

Use this Sub-group to configure Name#1, Type#1, Value#1, Name#2, Type#2, Value#2, Name#3, Type#3, Value#3, Name#4, Type#4, Value#4, Name#5, Type#5, and Value#5 .

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiAlertModeIntentExtras

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Name#1

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent  >  Intent Extras

Enter the name of a single extra to be attached to the intent to be sent.

Android allows a collection of extra named values, of various types, to be attached to an intent. When a name is specified, you must also specify Type#1 and Value#1 to provide the corresponding type and value of the extra to be attached to the intent.

Detail Information:

  • Key = alertButtonExtra1Name

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Type#1

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent  >  Intent Extras

Select the type of a single extra to be attached to the intent to be sent.

Android allows a collection of extra named values, of various types, to be attached to an intent. When a type is specified, you must also specify Name#1 and Value#1 to provide the corresponding name and value of the extra to be attached to the intent.

Detail Information:

  • Key = alertButtonExtra1Type

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Standard Integer  int 
 Character  char 
 Character Sequence  charsequence 
 Floating Point  float 
 Long Integer  long 
 Boolean  boolean 
 Short  short 
 Double Precision Floating Point  double 
 String  string 
 Single Byte Integer  byte 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Value#1

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent  >  Intent Extras

Enter the value of a single extra to be attached to the intent to be sent.

Android allows a collection of extra named values, of various types, to be attached to an intent. When a value is specified, you must also specify Type#1 and Name#1 to provide the corresponding type and name of the extra to be attached to the intent.

Detail Information:

  • Key = alertButtonExtra1Value

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Name#2

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent  >  Intent Extras

Enter the name of a single extra to be attached to the intent to be sent.

Android allows a collection of extra named values, of various types, to be attached to an intent. When a name is specified, you must also specify Type#2 and Value#2 to provide the corresponding type and value of the extra to be attached to the intent.

Detail Information:

  • Key = alertButtonExtra2Name

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Type#2

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent  >  Intent Extras

Select the type of a single extra to be attached to the intent to be sent.

Android allows a collection of extra named values, of various types, to be attached to an intent. When a type is specified, you must also specify Name#2 and Value#2 to provide the corresponding name and value of the extra to be attached to the intent.

Detail Information:

  • Key = alertButtonExtra2Type

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Standard Integer  int 
 Character  char 
 Character Sequence  charsequence 
 Floating Point  float 
 Long Integer  long 
 Boolean  boolean 
 Short  short 
 Double Precision Floating Point  double 
 String  string 
 Single Byte Integer  byte 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Value#2

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent  >  Intent Extras

Enter the value of a single extra to be attached to the intent to be sent.

Android allows a collection of extra named values, of various types, to be attached to an intent. When a value is specified, you must also specify Type#2 and Name#2 to provide the corresponding type and name of the extra to be attached to the intent.

Detail Information:

  • Key = alertButtonExtra2Value

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Name#3

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent  >  Intent Extras

Enter the name of a single extra to be attached to the intent to be sent.

Android allows a collection of extra named values, of various types, to be attached to an intent. When a name is specified, you must also specify Type#3 and Value#3 to provide the corresponding type and value of the extra to be attached to the intent.

Detail Information:

  • Key = alertButtonExtra3Name

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Type#3

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent  >  Intent Extras

Select the type of a single extra to be attached to the intent to be sent.

Android allows a collection of extra named values, of various types, to be attached to an intent. When a type is specified, you must also specify Name#3 and Value#3 to provide the corresponding name and value of the extra to be attached to the intent.

Detail Information:

  • Key = alertButtonExtra3Type

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Standard Integer  int 
 Character  char 
 Character Sequence  charsequence 
 Floating Point  float 
 Long Integer  long 
 Boolean  boolean 
 Short  short 
 Double Precision Floating Point  double 
 String  string 
 Single Byte Integer  byte 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Value#3

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent  >  Intent Extras

Enter the value of a single extra to be attached to the intent to be sent.

Android allows a collection of extra named values, of various types, to be attached to an intent. When a value is specified, you must also specify Type#3 and Name#3 to provide the corresponding type and name of the extra to be attached to the intent.

Detail Information:

  • Key = alertButtonExtra3Value

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Name#4

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent  >  Intent Extras

Enter the name of a single extra to be attached to the intent to be sent.

Android allows a collection of extra named values, of various types, to be attached to an intent. When a name is specified, you must also specify Type#4 and Value#4 to provide the corresponding type and value of the extra to be attached to the intent.

Detail Information:

  • Key = alertButtonExtra4Name

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Type#4

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent  >  Intent Extras

Select the type of a single extra to be attached to the intent to be sent.

Android allows a collection of extra named values, of various types, to be attached to an intent. When a type is specified, you must also specify Name#4 and Value#4 to provide the corresponding name and value of the extra to be attached to the intent.

Detail Information:

  • Key = alertButtonExtra4Type

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Standard Integer  int 
 Character  char 
 Character Sequence  charsequence 
 Floating Point  float 
 Long Integer  long 
 Boolean  boolean 
 Short  short 
 Double Precision Floating Point  double 
 String  string 
 Single Byte Integer  byte 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Value#4

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent  >  Intent Extras

Enter the value of a single extra to be attached to the intent to be sent.

Android allows a collection of extra named values, of various types, to be attached to an intent. When a value is specified, you must also specify Type#4 and Name#4 to provide the corresponding type and name of the extra to be attached to the intent.

Detail Information:

  • Key = alertButtonExtra4Value

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Name#5

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent  >  Intent Extras

Enter the name of a single extra to be attached to the intent to be sent.

Android allows a collection of extra named values, of various types, to be attached to an intent. When a name is specified, you must also specify Type#4 and Value#4 to provide the corresponding type and value of the extra to be attached to the intent.

Detail Information:

  • Key = alertButtonExtra5Name

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Type#5

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent  >  Intent Extras

Select the type of a single extra to be attached to the intent to be sent.

Android allows a collection of extra named values, of various types, to be attached to an intent. When a type is specified, you must also specify Name#5 and Value#5 to provide the corresponding name and value of the extra to be attached to the intent.

Detail Information:

  • Key = alertButtonExtra5Type

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Standard Integer  int 
 Character  char 
 Character Sequence  charsequence 
 Floating Point  float 
 Long Integer  long 
 Boolean  boolean 
 Short  short 
 Double Precision Floating Point  double 
 String  string 
 Single Byte Integer  byte 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Value#5

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent  >  Intent Extras

Enter the value of a single extra to be attached to the intent to be sent.

Android allows a collection of extra named values, of various types, to be attached to an intent. When a value is specified, you must also specify Type#5 and Name#5 to provide the corresponding type and name of the extra to be attached to the intent.

Detail Information:

  • Key = alertButtonExtra5Value

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Keep Device Awake

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent

Select whether the device should stay awake when the Alert Button is configured.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiAlertModeKeepAwake

  • Type = boolean

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Method

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent

Select the Method by which the Intent will be sent when the Alert Button is pressed, when the value of Long press on selected key is selected for Type.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiAlertModeMethod

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 StartActivity  StartActivity 
 StartService  StartService 
 Broadcast  Broadcast 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Sensor Identifier

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent

Select the sensor in the device that will be used to trigger or cancel the intent, when the value Sensor triggered is selected for Type.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiAlertModeSensorIdentifier

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 None   
 Free Fall Detection  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.5.

Sensor Parameter

   UI Configuration  >  Event-Triggered Intents  >  Event-Triggered Intent

Enter name of the extra to send in the intent that is sent for sensor status when the value !!4@uiConfig.keyboardConfig.alertConfig.uiAlertMode!! is selected for Type and !!StartActivity@uiConfig.eventTriggeredIntents.eventTriggeredIntent.uiAlertModeMethod!!, or !!StartService@uiConfig.eventTriggeredIntents.eventTriggeredIntent.uiAlertModeMethod!!, or !!Broadcast@uiConfig.eventTriggeredIntents.eventTriggeredIntent.uiAlertModeMethod!! is selected for Method.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiAlertModeSensorParameter

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

General UI Configuration

   UI Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Feature Usage, Localization, and UI Element.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiGeneralConfig

  • Type = bundle

Feature Usage Configuration

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Auto Correct, Clipboard, Sharing, Long Press on Home to Launch Google Assistant, Magnification Gestures, Notification Bar, Proximity Sensor, Screen Shot, SD Card, Access Clock from Date in Notification, and Battery Charging LED.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiFeaturesConfig

  • Type = bundle

Auto Correct

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  Feature Usage Configuration

Select whether the User will be presented with Automatic Correction suggestions to potential mistakes made during data entry.

  • If the value Off is selected, the User will NOT be presented with Automatic Correction suggestions to potential mistakes made during data entry.

  • If the value On is selected, the User MAY be presented with Automatic Correction suggestions to potential mistakes made during data entry.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiFeatureAutoCorrect

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

Clipboard

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  Feature Usage Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to utilize the Clipboard cut, copy, and paste text between applications.

  • If the value Allow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to utilize the Clipboard cut, copy, and paste text between applications.
  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to utilize the Clipboard cut, copy, and paste text between applications.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiFeatureClipboard

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.2.

Sharing

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  Feature Usage Configuration

Select whether the User will be allowed to utilize the clipboard Sharing on a device to share the contents of the clipboard.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiFeatureClipboardSharing

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.5.

  • Support discontinued from: MX 11.0.

Long Press on Home to Launch Google Assistant

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  Feature Usage Configuration

Select whether a the User will be Allowed to use a long press on the Home Key to Launch the Google Assistant.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to use a long press on the Home Key to Launch the Google Assistant.

  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to use a long press on the Home Key to Launch the Google Assistant.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiFeatureLongPressHomeToLaunchGoogleAssistant

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.2.

Magnification Gestures

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  Feature Usage Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to Use Magnification Gestures.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to Use Magnification Gestures.

  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to Use Magnification Gestures.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiFeatureMagnificationGestures

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 8.0.

Notification Bar

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  Feature Usage Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to Pull Down the Notification Bar to interact with notifications in the Notifications Panel.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to Pull Down the Notification Bar to interact with notifications in the Notifications Panel.

  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to Pull Down the Notification Bar to interact with notifications in the Notifications Panel.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiFeatureNotificationBar

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 5.1.

Proximity Sensor

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  Feature Usage Configuration

Select whether the proximity sensor will be used.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the proximity sensor will be used.

  • If the value Allow is selected, the proximity sensor will not be used.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiFeatureProximitySensor

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.5.

Screen Shot

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  Feature Usage Configuration

Select whether to allow or disallow the taking of a screen shot.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, screen shots will NOT be allowed.

  • If the value Allow is selected, screen shots will be allowed.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiFeatureScreenShot

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.5.

SD Card

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  Feature Usage Configuration

Select whether to allow or disallow the use of the SD card

  • If the value Disallow is selected, use of the SD card will NOT be allowed.

  • If the value Allow is selected, use of the SD card will be allowed.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiFeatureSDCard

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

Access Clock from Date in Notification

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  Feature Usage Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to Access the Clock Application from the Date displayed in a Notification in the Notification Panel.

  • If the value Allow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to Access the Clock Application from the Date displayed in a Notification in the Notification Panel.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to Access the Clock Application from the Date displayed in a Notification in the Notification Panel.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiFeatureDateInNotificationAccessClock

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Allow  1 
 Disallow  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.2.

Battery Charging LED

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  Feature Usage Configuration

Select whether the battery charging sub-system of the device will be allowed to use the battery charging LED to indicate the state of charging the device battery.

  • If the value Disable is selected, the battery charging sub-system of the device will NOT be allowed to use the battery charging LED to indicate the state of charging the device battery. This could be used to help eliminate distractions, such as when the device is charging in a cradle in a darkened vehicle or when many devices are charging in close proximity resulting in many flashing LEDs.

  • If the value Enable is selected, the battery charging sub-system of the device will NOT be allowed to use the battery charging LED to indicate the state of charging the device battery. This could be beneficial by allowing at-a-glance determination of the charging status of a device.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiFeatureBatteryChargingLED

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disable  2 
 Enable  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

Localization Configuration

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Locale and Custom Locale.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiLocalizationConfig

  • Type = bundle

Locale

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  Localization Configuration

Select the Locale to be used.

A Locale identifies where a device is being used and adjusts UI elements to suit that location. A Locale is specified by selecting a mandatory Language (e.g. English) and may optionally specify a Region (e.g. the United States) where that Language is spoken.

  • When only a Language is specified, the value selected will be the name of the Language (e.g. CHINA).

  • When both a Language and a Region are specified, the value selected will be the name of the Region followed by the name of the Language, separated by an underscore (e.g. CANADA_FRENCH).

  • When Custom is selected, the value specified in Custom Locale is required.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiLocalizationLocale

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Custom  CUSTOM 
 Arabic (Standard)  ar 
 Chinese (Simplified)  zh_CN 
 Chinese (Traditional)  zh_TW 
 Chinese spoken in China  zh_CN 
 Chinese (Standard)  zh 
 Danish spoken in Denmark  da_DK 
 Dutch (Standard)  nl 
 English spoken in Australia  en_AU 
 English spoken in Canada  en_CA 
 English spoken in India  en_IN 
 English spoken in the United Kingdom  en_GB 
 English spoken in the United States  en_US 
 English (Standard)  en 
 Finnish spoken in Finland  fi_FI 
 French spoken in Canada  fr_CA 
 French spoken in France  fr_FR 
 French (Standard)  fr 
 German spoken in Germany  de_DE 
 German (Standard)  de 
 Italian spoken in Italy  it_IT 
 Italian (Standard)  it 
 Japanese spoken in Japan  ja_JP 
 Japanese (Standard)  ja 
 Korean spoken in Korea  ko_KR 
 Korean (Standard)  ko 
 Norwegian spoken in Norway  nb_NO 
 Polish (Standard)  pl 
 Portuguese spoken in Brazil  pt_BR 
 Portuguese spoken in Portugal  pt_PT 
 Russian (Standard)  ru 
 Spanish spoken in Spain  es_ES 
 Spanish spoken in the United States  es_US 
 Swedish spoken in Sweden  sv_SE 
 Turkish (Standard)  tr 
 Ukrainian (Standard)  uk 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 5.1.

Custom Locale

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  Localization Configuration

Enter the Locale to be used.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiLocalizationCustomLocale

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 5.1.

UI Element Configuration

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Battery Percentage, Battery Swap Popup, Navigation Bar, Status Bar, On-Screen Power Button, Airplane Mode in Power Key Menu, Touch Mode in Power Key Menu, App Info Icon on Long Press on Recent App Header, App Management Notifications, Control Dark Theme, Passwords, Power Off in Power Key Menu, Talkback Shortcut, Assistant App, Custom Assistant App, Home Screen Wallpaper, Custom Home Screen Wallpaper, Control Airplane Mode, and Timer.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiElementConfig

  • Type = bundle

Battery Percentage

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  UI Element Configuration

Select whether the remaining battery level percentage of the device will be displayed on the Android Status Bar to augment the icon indicating the battery level in bars.

  • If the value Hide is selected, the remaining battery level percentage of the device will NOT be displayed.

  • If the value Show is selected, the remaining battery level percentage of the device WILL be displayed.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiElementBatteryPercentage

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Hide  2 
 Show  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.1.

Battery Swap Popup

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  UI Element Configuration

Select whether the User will be presented with a Battery Swap Popup UI to indicate the recommendation to swap the battery when the remaining battery level percentage of the device drops below a pre-defined, fixed threshold percentage.

  • If the value Disable is selected, the User will NOT be presented with a Battery Swap Popup UI.

  • If the value Enable is selected, the User MAY be presented with a Battery Swap Popup UI.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiElementBatterySwapPopup

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disable  2 
 Enable  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  UI Element Configuration

Select whether the Android Navigation Bar will be displayed and hence whether it will take up screen real estate and can be used by the User to navigate the device UI.

  • If the value Hide is selected, the Android Navigation Bar will NOT be displayed.

  • If the value Show is selected, the Android Navigation Bar WILL be displayed.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiElementNavigationBar

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Hide  2 
 Show  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 7.1.

Status Bar

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  UI Element Configuration

Select whether the Android Status Bar will be displayed.

  • If the value Hide is selected, the Android Status Bar will NOT be displayed.

  • If the value Show is selected, the Android Status Bar WILL be displayed.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiElementStatusBar

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Hide  2 
 Show  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.4.

On-Screen Power Button

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  UI Element Configuration

Select whether an on-screen power button will be displayed to allow the User to power the device fff.

  • If the value Disable is selected, an on-screen power button will NOT be displayed.

  • If the value Enable is selected, an on-screen power button WILL be displayed.

The on-screen power button behaves similarly to the physical power button and can be used to improve the user experience in cases where a physical power button is not present or is not convenient to use, such as when the User is wearing gloves.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiElementOnScreenPowerButton

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disable  2 
 Enable  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.3.

Airplane Mode in Power Key Menu

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  UI Element Configuration

Select whether the User will see an option to Control the State of Airplane Mode in the Menu presented when the power key is long pressed.

  • If the value Show is selected, the User WILL see an option to Control the State of Airplane Mode in the Menu presented when the power key is long pressed.

  • If the value Hide is selected, the User will NOT see an option to Control the State of Airplane Mode in the Menu presented when the power key is long pressed.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiElementAirplaneModeInPwrKeyMenu

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Hide  2 
 Show  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

Touch Mode in Power Key Menu

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  UI Element Configuration

Select whether the User will see an option to Control the Touch Mode in the Menu presented when the power key is long pressed.

  • If the value Show is selected, the User WILL see an option to Control the Touch Mode in the Menu presented when the power key is long pressed.

  • If the value Hide is selected, the User WILL NOT see an option to Control the Touch Mode in the Menu presented when the power key is long pressed.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiElementTouchModeInPwrKeyMenu

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Hide  2 
 Show  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

App Info Icon on Long Press on Recent App Header

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  UI Element Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to navigate to App Info Settings for an application by long pressing on the application icon in the Recent Apps list, and then clicking the (i) icon.

  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to navigate to App Info in this manner.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, User will NOT be Allowed to navigate to App Info in this manner.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiElementAppInfoOnLongPressRecentAppHeader

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Allow  1 
 Disallow  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.2.

App Management Notifications

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  UI Element Configuration

Select whether the User will see notifications when the Device Owner installs, uninstalls or upgrades applications. Applies to Android 11 and later.

  • If the value Show is selected, notifications WILL be shown to the User when the Device Owner installs, uninstalls, or upgrades applications.

  • If the value Hide is selected, notifications will NOT be shown to the User when the Device Owner installs, uninstalls, or upgrades applications.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiElementSilentAppInstall

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Show  1 
 Hide  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.5.

Control Dark Theme

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  UI Element Configuration

Select whether dark theme is used on the device.

  • If the value Off is selected, dark theme is not used.

  • If the value On is selected, dark theme is used.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiElementDarkTheme

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.3.

Passwords

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  UI Element Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to see Passwords as they are entered.

  • If the value Off is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to see Passwords as they are entered (Password characters will be masked as they are entered).

  • If the value On is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to see Passwords as they are entered (Password characters will be echoed as they are entered).

Note that this can increase usability, by reducing the chance of data entry errors, but should be used with caution since it can also reduce security by allowing Passwords to be disclosed (e.g. Shoulder surfing).

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiElementPasswords

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 9.1.

Power Off in Power Key Menu

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  UI Element Configuration

Select whether the User will see an option to Power Off the Device in the Menu presented when the power key is long pressed.

  • If the value Show is selected, the User WILL see an option to Power Off the Device in the Menu presented when the power key is long pressed.

  • If the value Hide is selected, the User will NOT see an option to Power Off the Device in the Menu presented when the power key is long pressed.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiElementPowerOffInPwrKeyMenu

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Hide  2 
 Show  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.1.

Talkback Shortcut

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  UI Element Configuration

Select whether the Talkback shortcut will be activated or not. Applies to Android 11 and later.

  • If the value Turn On is selected, the Talkback shortcut will be turned on and available for use by performing a long press of both volume buttons.

  • If the value Turn Off is selected, the Talkback shortcut will be turned off and not available for use.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiElementTalkbackShortcut

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Turn On  1 
 Turn Off  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: Mx 11.7.

Assistant App

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  UI Element Configuration

Select the assistant to use on the device.

  • If the value Google Digital Assistant is selected, the Google Digital Assistant will be used

  • If the value Custom assistant app is selected, the custom assistant app specified in %?uiConfig.uiGeneralConfig.uiElementConfig.uiElementCustomAssistantApp% will be used.

  • If the value None is selected, no assistant app will be used.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiElementAssistantApp

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do Not Change   
 Google Digital Assistant  1 
 Custom assistant app  2 
 None  3 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.5.

Custom Assistant App

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  UI Element Configuration

Enter the package name of the assistant application to be used on the device.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiElementCustomAssistantApp

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.5.

Home Screen Wallpaper

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  UI Element Configuration

Select the assistant to use on the device.

  • If the value Restore to default is selected, the default wallpaper will be used.

  • If the value Custom is selected, the custom wallpaper specified in %?uiConfig.uiGeneralConfig.uiElementConfig.uiElementCustomHomeWallpaper% will be used.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiElementHomeScreenWallpaper

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Restore to default  1 
 Custom  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.5.

Custom Home Screen Wallpaper

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  UI Element Configuration

Enter the path and file name of an image file on the device (.jpg or .png)

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiElementCustomHomeWallpaper

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.5.

Control Airplane Mode

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  UI Element Configuration

Select whether airplane mode should be forced off after a predetermined amount of time.

  • If the value Do not change is selected, then no change will be made to the functioning of airplane mode.

  • If the value Disable Airplane Mode automatic shut-off is selected, airplane mode will be left on until specifically turned off.

  • If the value Enable Airplane Mode automatic shut-off is selected, airplane mode will be forced OFF after the amount of time

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiElementControlAirplaneMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disable Airplane Mode automatic shut-off  2 
 Enable Airplane Mode automatic shut-off  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.5.

Timer

   UI Configuration  >  General UI Configuration  >  UI Element Configuration

Enter the amount of time (in minutes) after which airplane mode will be turned off.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiElementControlAirplaneModeTimer

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.5.

Keyboard Configuration

   UI Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Auto Trigger, Input Method, Large Key Indicator, Use of Home, Use of Recent Apps, User Control of Large Key Indicator, Virtual KB when Physical KB is Active, Double Trigger, External Keyboard Configurations, External Keyboard Shortcut Keys, and External Keyboard Num Lock Handling.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keyboardConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Auto Trigger Configuration

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure State and Range.

Detail Information:

  • Key = autoTriggerConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

State

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration  >  Auto Trigger Configuration

Select whether and how Automatic Triggering will occur.

  • If the value Off is selected, Automatic Triggering will never occur and the User will be required to manually initiate trigger-activated functions.

  • If the value Auto On is selected, Automatic Triggering may occur if the device is placed into a suitable holster, holder, or stand allowing the User to initiate trigger-activated functions simply by bringing an object within proximity to the device sensor.

  • If the value Always On is selected, automatic triggering can always occur automatically , whether the device is placed into a suitable holster, holder, or stand allowing the User to initiate trigger-activated functions simply by bringing an object within proximity to the device sensor.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiAutoTriggerState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Off  0 
 Auto On  1 
 Always On  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

Range

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration  >  Auto Trigger Configuration

Select the range at which automatic triggering will detect the presence of an object and initiate automatic triggering.

  • If the value Near is selected, automatic triggering will occur only when an object is brought within near proximity to the device sensor. This may be desirable if the device is being worn in a holster and hence it is convenient to bring objects very close to the device sensor.

  • If the value Far is selected, automatic triggering will occur when an object is brought within less near proximity to the device sensor. This may be desirable if the device is located in a stand or holder and hence it is less convenient to have to bring objects very close to the device sensor.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiAutoTriggerRange

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Near  0 
 Far  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

Input Method

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration

Select the input method.

  • If the value English(US) is selected, the input method will be configured for US English.

  • If the value Japanese is selected, the input method will be configured for Japanese.

  • If the value Chinese(China) is selected, the input method will be configured for China Chinese.

  • To select a custom input method, use the class variance of the Package Configuration category of managed configurations.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keyboardInputMethod

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 English(US)  English 
 Japanese  Japanese 
 Chinese(China)  Chinese 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

Large Key Indicator

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration

Select whether the Large Key Indicator will be displayed to indicate the state physical keypad.

  • If the value Hide is selected, the Large Key Indicator will NOT be displayed.

  • If the value Show is selected, the Large Key Indicator WILL be displayed.

Note that this can assist the User in cases where multiple key sequences are required.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keyboardLargeKeyIndicator

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Hide  2 
 Show  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 9.0.

Use of Home

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to utilize the Home Key on a device to leave the current context and return to the Home/Launcher screen.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to utilize the Home Key.

  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to utilize the Home Key.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keyboardUseOfHome

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

Use of Recent Apps

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to Use the Recent Apps Key to access recently launched applications.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to Use the Recent Apps Key to access recently launched applications.

  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to Use the Recent Apps Key to access recently launched applications.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keyboardUseOfRecentApps

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 7.1.

User Control of Large Key Indicator

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to control whether the Large Key Indicator will be displayed.

  • If the value Enable is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to control whether the Large Key Indicator will be displayed.

  • If the value Disable is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to control whether the Large Key Indicator will be displayed.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keyboardUserControlOfLargeKeyIndicator

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Enable  1 
 Disable  2 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 9.0.

Virtual KB when Physical KB is Active

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration

Select whether the on-screen Virtual Keyboard will be shown when the Physical Keyboard is Active.

  • If the value Hide is selected, the on-screen Virtual Keyboard will NOT be shown when the Physical Keyboard is Active.

  • If the value Show is selected, the on-screen Virtual Keyboard WILL be shown when the Physical Keyboard is Active.

Note that this can help avoid the annoyance and confusion of using up screen real-estate to display an on-screen keyboard when the User is using a Physical Keyboard to enter data.

Detail Information:

  • Key = keyboardShowVirtualKbWhenPhysicalKbActive

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Hide  2 
 Show  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.0.

Double Trigger

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Maximum Time Between Trigger Pulls, Mode, Alt State, Ctrl State, Fn State, Key Code, and Shift State.

Detail Information:

  • Key = doubleTrigger

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.4.

Maximum Time Between Trigger Pulls

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration  >  Double Trigger

Enter the maximum time allowed for a double trigger pull to be considered in milliseconds.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dtMaxTime

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.4.

Mode

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration  >  Double Trigger

Select whether a double trigger will send a key code.

  • If Send a key-code is selected, a double trigger pull within the window specified by Maximum Time Between Trigger Pulls will cause the key code specified in Key Code to be sent.

  • If Don't send a key-code is selected, a double trigger pull will not send a key code.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dtMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Send a key-code  1 
 Don't send a key-code  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.4.

Alt State

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration  >  Double Trigger

Select whether the Key Code specified via Key Code will be sent with the Alt keyboard state.

  • If the value Off is selected, when the Key Code is sent, it will NOT be sent with the Alt keyboard state NOT set. This will ensure that the Key Code will NOT interpreted as an Alt key.

  • If the value On is selected, when the Key Code is sent, it WILL be sent with the Alt keyboard state set. This will ensure that the Key Code WILL be interpreted as an Alt key.

  • If no value is specified, when the Key Code is sent, it will be sent with the CURRENT Alt key state. This will cause the Key Code to be interpreted as an Alt key or not based on the current Alt key state.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dtAltState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 On  1 
 Off  0 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.4.

Ctrl State

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration  >  Double Trigger

Select whether the Key Code specified via Key Code will be sent with the Ctrl keyboard state when it is sent as the Behavior for a specified Key.

  • If the value Off is selected, when the Key Code is sent, it will NOT be sent with the Ctrl keyboard state NOT set. This will ensure that the Key Code will NOT interpreted as an Ctrl key.

  • If the value On is selected, when the Key Code is sent, it WILL be sent with the Ctrl keyboard state set. This will ensure that the Key Code WILL be interpreted as an Ctrl key.

  • If no value is specified, when the Key Code is sent, it will be sent with the CURRENT Ctrl key state. This will cause the Key Code to be interpreted as an Ctrl key or not based on the current Ctrl key state.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dtCtrlState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 On  1 
 Off  0 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.4.

Fn State

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration  >  Double Trigger

Select whether the Key Code specified via Key Code will be sent with the Fn keyboard state when it is sent as the Behavior for a specified Key.

  • If the value Off is selected, when the Key Code is sent, it will NOT be sent with the Fn keyboard state NOT set. This will ensure that the Key Code will NOT interpreted as an Fn key.

  • If the value On is selected, when the Key Code is sent, it WILL be sent with the Fn keyboard state set. This will ensure that the Key Code WILL be interpreted as an Fn key.

  • If no value is specified, when the Key Code is sent, it will be sent with the CURRENT Fn key state. This will cause the Key Code to be interpreted as an Fn key or not based on the current Fn key state.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dtFnState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 On  1 
 Off  0 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.4.

Key Code

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration  >  Double Trigger

Select the key code to send when Send a key-code is set to Mode and a double trigger is performed.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dtKeyCode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 0  7 
 1  8 
 2  9 
 3  10 
 4  11 
 5  12 
 6  13 
 7  14 
 8  15 
 9  16 
 + (Plus)  81 
 - (Minus)  69 
 = (Equals)  70 
 ( (Left Bracket)  71 
 ) (Right Bracket)  72 
 ` (Grave)  68 
 / (Slash)  76 
 \\\\ (Backslash)  73 
 ; (Semicolon)  74 
 ' (Apostrophe)  75 
 , (Comma)  55 
 . (Period)  56 
  (Star)  17 
 # (Pound)  18 
 @ (At)  77 
 A  29 
 B  30 
 C  31 
 D  32 
 E  33 
 F  34 
 G  35 
 H  36 
 I  37 
 J  38 
 K  39 
 L  40 
 M  41 
 N  42 
 O  43 
 P  44 
 Q  45 
 R  46 
 S  47 
 T  48 
 U  49 
 V  50 
 W  51 
 X  52 
 Y  53 
 Z  54 
 Enter  66 
 Tab  61 
 Space  62 
 Escape  111 
 Delete  67 
 F1  131 
 F2  132 
 F3  133 
 F4  134 
 F5  135 
 F6  136 
 F7  137 
 F8  138 
 F9  139 
 F10  140 
 F11  141 
 F12  142 
 NUMPAD 0  144 
 NUMPAD 1  145 
 NUMPAD 2  146 
 NUMPAD 3  147 
 NUMPAD 4  148 
 NUMPAD 5  149 
 NUMPAD 6  150 
 NUMPAD 7  151 
 NUMPAD 8  152 
 NUMPAD 9  153 
 NUMPAD / (NUMPAD Divide)  154 
 NUMPAD * (NUMPAD Multiply)  155 
 NUMPAD - (NUMPAD Subtract)  156 
 NUMPAD + (NUMPAD Add)  157 
 NUMPAD . (NUMPAD Period)  158 
 NUMPAD , (NUMPAD Comma)  159 
 NUMPAD Enter  160 
 NUMPAD = (NUMPAD Equals)  161 
 NUMPAD { (NUMPAD Left Parenthesis)  162 
 NUMPAD } (NUMPAD Right Parenthesis)  163 
 DPAD Up  19 
 DPAD Down  20 
 DPAD Left  21 
 DPAD Right  22 
 DPAD Center  23 
 Move Home  122 
 Move End  123 
 Page Up  92 
 Page Down  93 
 Insert  124 
 Forward Delete  112 
 Clear  28 
 Lamp  10024 
 Do Nothing  10026 
 Blue  10027 
 Orange  10028 
 Grey  10029 
 Diamond  10039 
 Alt  10030 
 Control  10031 
 Shift  10032 
 Keyboard  10034 
 Touch Calibrate  10035 
 Scan  10036 
 Search Key  10037 
 None  10038 
 KeyLight  10025 
 Keylight Up  10040 
 Keylight Down  10041 
 Left Shift  59 
 Right Shift  60 
 Left Alt  57 
 Right Alt  58 
 Left Control  113 
 Right Control  114 
 Meta Left  117 
 Meta Right  118 
 Caps Lock  115 
 Num Lock  143 
 Scroll Lock  116 
 SysRq  120 
 Break  121 
 Function  119 
 Back  4 
 Forward  125 
 Home  3 
 Menu  82 
 Settings  176 
 Application Switch  187 
 Calculator  210 
 Explorer  64 
 Envelope  65 
 Bookmark  174 
 Music  209 
 Call  5 
 End Call  6 
 Microphone Mute  91 
 Camera  27 
 Search  84 
 Contacts  207 
 Calendar  208 
 Volume Up  24 
 Volume Down  25 
 Volume Mute  164 
 Brightness Up  221 
 Brightness Down  220 
 Power  26 
 Sleep  223 
 Wakeup  224 
 Headset  79 
 Push-to-talk  228 
 Camera Focus  80 
 Media Play/Pause  85 
 Media Stop  86 
 Media Next  87 
 Media Previous  88 
 Media Rewind  89 
 Media Fast-Forward  90 
 Media Play  126 
 Media Pause  127 
 Media Close  128 
 Media Eject  129 
 Media Record  130 
 Button L1  102 
 Button R1  103 
 Button L2  104 
 Button R2  105 
 Button A  96 
 Button B  97 
 Button C  98 
 Button X  99 
 Button Y  100 
 Button Z  101 
 Left Thumb Button  106 
 Right Thumb Button  107 
 Start Button  108 
 Select Button  109 
 Mode Button  110 
 Gamepad Button 1  188 
 Gamepad Button 2  189 
 Gamepad Button 3  190 
 Gamepad Button 4  191 
 Gamepad Button 5  192 
 Gamepad Button 6  193 
 Gamepad Button 7  194 
 Gamepad Button 8  195 
 Gamepad Button 9  196 
 Gamepad Button 10  197 
 Gamepad Button 11  198 
 Gamepad Button 12  199 
 Gamepad Button 13  200 
 Gamepad Button 14  201 
 Gamepad Button 15  202 
 Gamepad Button 16  203 
 Zenkaku/Hankaku  211 
 Eisu  212 
 Muhenkan  213 
 Henkan  214 
 Katakana/Hiragana  215 
 Ro  217 
 Yen  216 
 Kana  218 
 Keyboard  10034 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.4.

Shift State

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration  >  Double Trigger

Select whether the Key Code specified via Key Code will be sent with the Shift keyboard state when it is sent as the Behavior for a specified Key.

  • If the value Off is selected, when the Key Code is sent, it will NOT be sent with the Shift keyboard state NOT set. This will ensure that the Key Code will NOT interpreted as an Shift key.

  • If the value On is selected, when the Key Code is sent, it WILL be sent with the Shift keyboard state set. This will ensure that the Key Code WILL be interpreted as an Shift key.

  • If no value is specified, when the Key Code is sent, it will be sent with the CURRENT Shift key state. This will cause the Key Code to be interpreted as an Shift key or not based on the current Shift key state.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dtShiftState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 On  1 
 Off  0 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.4.

External Keyboard Configurations

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more External Keyboard Configuration(s).

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiExternalKeyboardConfigs

  • Type = bundle_array

External Keyboard Configuration

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration  >  External Keyboard Configurations

Use this Sub-group to configure Keyboard Name and Layout Name.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiExternalKeyboardConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.5.

Keyboard Name

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration  >  External Keyboard Configurations  >  External Keyboard Configuration

Select the keyboard name to associate the layout being defined.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiEKCName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.5.

Layout Name

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration  >  External Keyboard Configurations  >  External Keyboard Configuration

Select the keyboard layout name being defined.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiEKCLayoutName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.5.

External Keyboard Shortcut Keys

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more External Keyboard Shortcut Key(s).

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiExternalKeyboardShortcuts

  • Type = bundle_array

External Keyboard Shortcut Key

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration  >  External Keyboard Shortcut Keys

Use this Sub-group to configure Key ID and Action.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiEKbSCK

  • Type = bundle

Key ID

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration  >  External Keyboard Shortcut Keys  >  External Keyboard Shortcut Key

Select the ID of the shortcut key to which an action is to be defined.

Detail Information:

  • Key = scKID

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Win+D  1 
 Win+E  2 
 Win+L  3 
 Win+M  4 
 Win+Tab  5 
 Win+Up  6 
 Win+Down  7 
 Esc  8 
 Alt+F4  9 
 Alt+Tab  10 
 PrintScreen  11 
 Ctrl+Alt+Del  12 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.6.

Action

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration  >  External Keyboard Shortcut Keys  >  External Keyboard Shortcut Key

Select the action to perform when the associated shortcut key is pressed. If Do nothing (ignore key) is pressed, then no action is performed when the key associated with the key ID is pressed. If Perform standard handling (default) is pressed, then the standard action associated with the key ID is performed. If Send to focused app is pressed, then the key code associated with the key ID is sent to the application currently in-focus.

Detail Information:

  • Key = scKaction

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do nothing (ignore key)  1 
 Perform standard handling (default)  2 
 Send to focused app  3 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.6.

External Keyboard Num Lock Handling

   UI Configuration  >  Keyboard Configuration

Select how the Num Lock key on the external keyboard should behave. if Use keyboard's NUM LOCK state is selected, the current state of the Num Lock key will be used. If Force NUM LOCK state always is selected, Num Lock will be forced into the ON state.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiExternalKeyboardNumLockHandling

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do Not Change   
 Use keyboard's NUM LOCK state  1 
 Force NUM LOCK state always  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.6.

Settings UI Configuration

   UI Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Quick Settings, User Access, User Control, and Settings Variant.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiSettingsConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

Quick Settings

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Quick Setting(s).

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiQuickSettings

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.2.

Quick Setting

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  Quick Settings

Use this Sub-group to configure Quick Tile Identifier and Quick Tile Custom Identifier.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiQSQuickSetting

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.2.

Quick Tile Identifier

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  Quick Settings  >  Quick Setting

Select the action to show/hide a specific Quick Settings tile on the device.

  • If the value Airplane mode is selected, the Airplane mode Quick Settings Tile will be shown or hidden

  • If the value Auto-rotate is selected, the Auto-rotate Quick Settings Tile will be shown or hidden

  • If the value Battery Saver is selected, the Battery Saver Quick Settings Tile will be shown or hidden

  • If the value Bedtime mode is selected, the Bedtime mode Quick Settings Tile will be shown or hidden

  • If the value Bluetooth is selected, the Bluetooth Quick Settings Tile will be shown or hidden

  • If the value Dark theme is selected, the Dark theme Quick Settings Tile will be shown or hidden

  • If the value Data Saver is selected, the Data Saver Quick Settings Tile will be shown or hidden

  • If the value Do Not Disturb is selected, the Do Not Disturb Quick Settings Tile will be shown or hidden

  • If the value Flashlight is selected, the Flashlight Quick Settings Tile will be shown or hidden

  • If the value Focus mode is selected, the Focus mode Quick Settings Tile will be shown or hidden

  • If the value Hotspot is selected, the Hotspot Quick Settings Tile will be shown or hidden

  • If the value Invert colors is selected, the Invert colors Quick Settings Tile will be shown or hidden

  • If the value Location is selected, the Location Quick Settings Tile will be shown or hidden

  • If the value Mobile data is selected, the Mobile data Quick Settings Tile will be shown or hidden

  • If the value NFC is selected, the NFC Quick Settings Tile will be shown or hidden

  • If the value Nearby Share is selected, the Nearby Share Quick Settings Tile will be shown or hidden

  • If the value Night Light is selected, the Night Light Quick Settings Tile will be shown or hidden

  • If the value Screen Cast is selected, the Screen Cast Quick Settings Tile will be shown or hidden

  • If the value Screen Record is selected, the Screen Record Quick Settings Tile will be shown or hidden

  • If the value Wi-Fi is selected, the Wi-Fi Quick Settings Tile will be shown or hidden

  • If the value Custom is selected, a name of the custom Quick Settings Tile must be entered to be shown or hidden

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiQSTileIdentifier

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Airplane mode  Airplane mode 
 Auto-rotate  Auto-rotate 
 Battery Saver  Battery Saver 
 Bedtime mode  Bedtime mode 
 Bluetooth  Bluetooth 
 Dark theme  Dark theme 
 Data Saver  Data Saver 
 Do Not Disturb  Do Not Disturb 
 Flashlight  Flashlight 
 Focus mode  Focus mode 
 Hotspot  Hotspot 
 Invert colors  Invert colors 
 Location  Location 
 Mobile data  Mobile data 
 NFC  NFC 
 Nearby Share  Nearby Share 
 Night Light  Night Light 
 Screen Cast  Screen Cast 
 Screen Record  Screen Record 
 Wi-Fi  Wi-Fi 
 Custom  Custom 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Quick Tile Custom Identifier

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  Quick Settings  >  Quick Setting

Enter the name of the custom Quick Setting tile to show/hide on the device

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiQSTileCustomIdentifier

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.2.

User Access Configuration

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Split Screen Mode, Multi User, Mute/Vibrate Usage, App Info Section, Control Apps, Control Default Apps, Control Vibrate for Calls, Device Storage via USB, Quick Settings, Settings Via Notification Icon, Tethering and Hotspot Section, User Control of Notification Settings, and WLAN Section.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserAccessConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Split Screen Mode

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Access Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to Access Split Screen Mode.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to Access Split Screen Mode.
  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to Access Split Screen Mode.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserAccessSplitScreenMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

Multi User

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Access Configuration

Select whether the Primary User will be Allowed to Access the Multi User Section of the Settings UI, which provides the ability to Create, Delete, and limit the actions of Secondary Users.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the Primary User will NOT be Allowed to Access the Multi User Section of the Settings UI.
  • If the value Allow is selected, the Primary User WILL be Allowed to Access the Multi User Section of the Settings UI.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserAccessMultiUser

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

Mute/Vibrate Usage

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Access Configuration

Select whether the device user can change the state of mute and vibrate.

  • If the value Allow is selected, the device user will be allowed to change the state of the mute and/or vibrate state.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the device user will not be allowed to change the state of the mute and/or vibrate state.

Detail Information:

  • Key = audioMuteVibrateUsage

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.6.

App Info Section

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Access Configuration

Select whether the User will be allowed to Access the App Info section of the Settings UI.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be allowed to Access the App Info section of the Settings UI.
  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be allowed to Access the App Info section of the Settings UI.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserAccessAppInfoSection

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Control Apps

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Access Configuration

Select whether the device user will be allowed to enter the AppInfo section of the Settings UI where applications can be controlled.

  • If the value Off is selected, any attempt by the device user to enter the AppInfo section of the Settings UI will be ignored.
  • If the value On is selected, attempts by the device user to enter the AppInfo section of the Settings will be honored.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserControlApps

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.2.

Control Default Apps

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Access Configuration

Select whether the device user will be allowed to change the Default App used for standard functionality

  • If the value Disable for Dialer is selected, the device user will not be allowed to change the default dialer.
  • If the value Enable for Dialer is selected, the device user will be allowed to change the default dialer.
  • If the value Disable for Browser is selected, the device user will not be allowed to change the default browser.
  • If the value Enable for Browser is selected, the device user will be allowed to change the default browser.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserControlDefaultApps

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Enable for Dialer  1 
 Disable for Dialer  2 
 Enable for Browser  3 
 Disable for Browser  4 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.4.

Control Vibrate for Calls

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Access Configuration

Select whether the device user will be allowed to change the state of the vibrate for calls setting.

  • If the value Disable is selected, the device user will not be allowed to change the state of vibrate for calls.
  • If the value Enable is selected, the device user will be allowed to change the state of vibrate for calls.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserControlVibrateForCallsUsage

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Enable  1 
 Disable  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.3.

Device Storage via USB

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Access Configuration

Select whether the User will be allowed to Access Device Storage via USB.

  • If the value Disable is selected, the User will NOT be allowed to Access Device Storage via USB.
  • If the value Enable is selected, the User WILL be allowed to Access Device Storage via USB.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserAccessDeviceStorageViaUsb

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disable  2 
 Enable  1 

Quick Settings

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Access Configuration

Select whether the User will be permitted to Access the Quick Settings UI.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, any attempt by the User to enter the Quick Settings Panel will be ignored.

  • If the value Allow is selected, attempts by the User to enter the Quick Settings Panel will be honored and the Quick Settings Panel UI will be presented on request.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserAccessToQuickSettings

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 5.2.

Settings Via Notification Icon

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Access Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to Access the Settings UI via the Settings (Gear) Icon on the Notification Panel.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to Access the Settings UI via the Settings (Gear) Icon on the Notification Panel.
  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to Access the Settings UI via the Settings (Gear) Icon on the Notification Panel.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserAccessSettingsViaNotificationIcon

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 5.1.

Tethering and Hotspot Section

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Access Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to Access Tethering and Hotspot Section of the Settings UI.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to Access Tethering and Hotspot Section of the Settings UI.
  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to Access Tethering and Hotspot Section of the Settings UI.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserAccessTetheringAndPortableHotspot

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

User Control of Notification Settings

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Access Configuration

Select whether the device user is allowed to control App Notifications.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, any attempt by the device user to change the configuration of application notifications will be blocked.

  • If the value Allow is selected, attempts by the device user to change the configuration of application notifications will be honored.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserAccessNotificationSettingsFromNotification

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 7.2.

WLAN Section

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Access Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to Access the WLAN section of the Settings UI.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to Access the WLAN section of the Settings UI.
  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to Access the WLAN section of the Settings UI.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserAccessWlanSection

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

User Control Configuration

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Do Not Disturb Mode, Airplane Mode, Bluetooth, Configure Default Client Mode, Control USB Host Mode, Control USB Host Mode Rules, Edit Quick Settings, Erase All Data, Install From Unknown Sources, Instant Lock, USB ADB State, and USB State.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserControlConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Do Not Disturb Mode

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Control Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to Control the State of Do Not Disturb Mode.

  • If the value Show is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to Control the State of Do Not Disturb Mode.
  • If the value Hide is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to Control the State of Do Not Disturb Mode.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserControlDoNotDisturb

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Hide  2 
 Show  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

Airplane Mode

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Control Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to change the State of Airplane Mode.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to change the State of Airplane Mode.
  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to change the State of Airplane Mode.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserControlOfAirplaneMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Bluetooth

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Control Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to change the State of Bluetooth

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to change the State of Bluetooth.
  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to change the State of Bluetooth.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserControlOfBluetooth

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.2.

Configure Default Client Mode

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Control Configuration

Select the default configuration of an attached USB client.

  • If the value Charging Only (no data transfer) is selected, "Charging Only" will be the default mode for client USB devices.
  • If the value File Transfer is selected, "File Transfer" will be the default mode for client USB devices.
  • If the value MIDI is selected, "MIDI" will be the default mode for client USB devices.
  • If the value PTP is selected, "PTP" will be the default mode for client USB devices.
  • If the value USB Tethering is selected, "USB Tethering" will be the default mode for client USB devices.

Detail Information:

  • Key = settingsUsbClientModeDefault

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Charging Only (no data transfer)  0L 
 File Transfer  4L 
 MIDI  8L 
 PTP  16L 
 USB Tethering  32L 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.4.

Control USB Host Mode

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Control Configuration

Select whether to control USB connections and pop-up messages when device is in USB Host Mode

  • If the value Uncontrolled (default) is selected, USB Host Mode will behave normally.
  • If the value Controlled (rules list) is selected, The rules specified in Control USB Host Mode Rules will be used.

Detail Information:

  • Key = settingsUsbHostModeControl

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Uncontrolled (default)  1 
 Controlled (rules list)  2 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.6.

Control USB Host Mode Rules

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Control Configuration

Enter an XML-based set of rules that define the USB peripheral(s) the mobile device is allowed to use and/or pre-grant app(s) access to the peripheral(s) without pop-up messages. For more information, see techdocs.zebra.com/mx/usbmgr.

Detail Information:

  • Key = settingsUsbHostModeRules

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.6.

Edit Quick Settings

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Control Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to edit the quick settings panel.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to edit the Quick Settings Panel.
  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to edit the Quick Settings Panel.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserControlEditQuickSettings

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.2.

Erase All Data

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Control Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to Erase All Data (perform an Enterprise Reset) from the Settings UI.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to Erase All Data (perform an Enterprise Reset) from the Settings UI.
  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to Erase All Data (perform an Enterprise Reset) from the Settings UI.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserControlEnterpriseReset

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Install From Unknown Sources

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Control Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to install applications from unknown sources.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to install applications from unknown sources.
  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to install applications from unknown sources.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserUnknownSources

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

Instant Lock

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Control Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to control Instant Lock on Power Key.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to control Instant Lock on Power Key.
  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to control Instant Lock on Power Key.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserControlInstantLock

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

USB ADB State

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Control Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to control the USB ADB State.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to control the USB ADB State.
  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to control the USB ADB State.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserControlUsbADBState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 4.2.

USB State

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration  >  User Control Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to control the USB Power State.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to control the USB Power State.
  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to control the USB Power State.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiUserControlUsbState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 4.2.

Settings Variant

   UI Configuration  >  Settings UI Configuration

Select which variant of the Settings Ul (Reduced or Full) will be used.

  • If the value None is selected, then no Settings Ul will be used.

  • If the value Partial without Accessibility is selected, the Reduced (Partial) variant of the Settings Ul will be used without the Accessibility Menu

  • If the value Partial with Accessibility is selected, the Reduced (Partial) variant of the Settings Ul will be used including the Accessibility Menu

  • If the value Full is selected, the Full variant of the Settings Ul will be used.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiSettingsVariant

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Full  1 
 Partial without Accessibility  2 
 Partial with Accessibility  4 
 None  3 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 4.1.

Touch Panel Configuration

   UI Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Touch and Hold Delay, Touch Mode, and Screen Protector.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiTouchPanelConfig

  • Type = bundle

Touch and Hold Delay

   UI Configuration  >  Touch Panel Configuration

Select the Touch and Hold delay. The Touch and Hold delay is the amount of time that the display is continuously touched to identify "long press"

  • If the value Short is selected, a duration of 400ms will be set.

  • If the value Medium is selected, a duration of 1000ms will be set.

  • If the value Long is selected, a duration of 1500ms will be set.

Detail Information:

  • Key = touchAndHoldDelay

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Short  400 
 Medium  1000 
 Long  1500 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.8.

Touch Mode

   UI Configuration  >  Touch Panel Configuration

Select the Touch Panel to be used.

  • If the value Stylus or Finger is selected, the Touch Panel will be configured to optimize use with a Stylus or an ungloved Finger.

  • If the value Glove or Finger is selected, the Touch Panel will be configured to optimize use with a Gloved finger or an ungloved Finger.

  • If the value Finger Only is selected, the Touch Panel will be configured to optimize an ungloved Finger.

  • If the value Stylus or Glove or Finger is selected, the Touch Panel will be configured to optimize use with a Stylus, a Gloved finger, or an ungloved Finger.

  • If the value Finger and Wet is selected, the Touch Panel will be configured to optimize use with a finger on a wet touch panel

Not all devices support the ability to configure the Touch Panel mode and those that do may not support every mode.

  • An attempt to configure the Touch Panel mode on a device that does not support it will result in an error.

  • An attempt to configure a Touch Panel mode on a device that does not support that mode will result in an error.

Detail Information:

  • Key = touchMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Stylus or Finger  Stylus and Finger 
 Glove or Finger  Glove and Finger 
 Finger Only  Finger 
 Stylus or Glove or Finger  Stylus and Glove and Finger 
 Finger and Wet  Finger and Wet 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 9.1.

Screen Protector

   UI Configuration  >  Touch Panel Configuration

Select whether the Touch Panel configuration will be optimized for use with a Screen Protector.

  • If selected, the Touch Panel configuration will NOT be optimized for use with a Screen Protector.

  • If unselected, the Touch Panel configuration WILL be optimized for use with a Screen Protector.

Not all devices support the ability to configure the Touch Panel to account for the use or a Screen Protector.

Detail Information:

  • Key = touchScreenProtector

  • Type = boolean

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 9.1.

Volume UI Profiles

   UI Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Volume UI Profile(s).

Detail Information:

  • Key = zvcprofiles

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 4.4.

Volume UI Profile

   UI Configuration  >  Volume UI Profiles

Use this Sub-group to configure Profile Name, Make Current, Adjust Volume, and Stream.

Detail Information:

  • Key = zvcprofile

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Profile Name

   UI Configuration  >  Volume UI Profiles  >  Volume UI Profile

Enter the Profile Name for an Audio UI Profile in the Zebra Volume Control UI.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiVolumeProfileName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Make Current

   UI Configuration  >  Volume UI Profiles  >  Volume UI Profile

Select whether a Profile should be made the current active Profile in the Zebra Volume Control UI.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiVolumeMakeCurrent

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Make Current  1 
 Do NOT Make Current  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Adjust Volume

   UI Configuration  >  Volume UI Profiles  >  Volume UI Profile

Select whether the current device Volume Settings will be adjusted to ensure that they fall within the range of Volume Settings defined by an Audio UI Profile being made the new current Audio UI Profile to be made the current active Audio UI Profile.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiVolumeAdjustVolume

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Off  Off 
 On  On 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Stream Configuration

   UI Configuration  >  Volume UI Profiles  >  Volume UI Profile

Use this Sub-group to configure STREAM_MUSIC for HDMI Output, STREAM_MUSIC on Bluetooth Headset, STREAM_MUSIC on Speaker, STREAM_MUSIC on Wired Headset, STREAM_ALARM on Speaker/Wired and Bluetooth Headsets, STREAM_RING/STREAM_NOTIFICATION/STRING_SYSTEM on Speaker/Wired and Bluetooth Headsets, STREAM_VOICE_CALL on Bluetooth Headset, STREAM_VOICE_CALL on Receiver, STREAM_VOICE_CALL on Speaker, STREAM_VOICE_CALL on Wired Headset, Decode Beep on Speaker/Wired and Bluetooth Headsets, and Keyboard Feedback on Speaker/Wired and Bluetooth Headsets.

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiVolumeStream

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

STREAM_MUSIC for HDMI Output

   UI Configuration  >  Volume UI Profiles  >  Volume UI Profile  >  Stream Configuration

Enter volume levels for music stream on HDMI. Use comma separated integers for min,max,preset from 0-15, e.g. 1,15,12

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiVolumeSMHDMI

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

STREAM_MUSIC on Bluetooth Headset

   UI Configuration  >  Volume UI Profiles  >  Volume UI Profile  >  Stream Configuration

Enter volume levels for music stream on Bluetooth Headset. Use comma separated integers for min,max,preset from 0-15, e.g. 1,15,12

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiVolumeSMBTHeadset

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

STREAM_MUSIC on Speaker

   UI Configuration  >  Volume UI Profiles  >  Volume UI Profile  >  Stream Configuration

Enter volume levels for music stream on Speaker. Use comma separated integers for min,max,preset from 0-15, e.g. 1,15,12

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiVolumeSMSpeaker

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

STREAM_MUSIC on Wired Headset

   UI Configuration  >  Volume UI Profiles  >  Volume UI Profile  >  Stream Configuration

Enter volume levels for music stream on Wired Headset. Use comma separated integers for min,max,preset from 0-15, e.g. 1,15,12

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiVolumeSMWiredHeadset

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

STREAM_ALARM on Speaker/Wired and Bluetooth Headsets

   UI Configuration  >  Volume UI Profiles  >  Volume UI Profile  >  Stream Configuration

Enter volume levels for alarm stream on Speaker, Wired Headst and Bluetooth Headset. Use comma separated integers for min,max,preset from 1-7, e.g. 1,7,5

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiVolumeSASpkrWHBH

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

STREAM_RING/STREAM_NOTIFICATION/STRING_SYSTEM on Speaker/Wired and Bluetooth Headsets

   UI Configuration  >  Volume UI Profiles  >  Volume UI Profile  >  Stream Configuration

Enter volume levels for ring/notification.system on Speaker, Wired or Bluetooth Headsets. Use comma separated integers for min,max,preset from 0-7, e.g. 1,7,5

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiVolumeSRSNSSSpkrWHBH

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

STREAM_VOICE_CALL on Bluetooth Headset

   UI Configuration  >  Volume UI Profiles  >  Volume UI Profile  >  Stream Configuration

Enter volume levels for voice call stream on Bluetooth Headsets. Use comma separated integers for min,max,preset from 1-5, e.g. 1,5,4

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiVolumeSVCBTH

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

STREAM_VOICE_CALL on Receiver

   UI Configuration  >  Volume UI Profiles  >  Volume UI Profile  >  Stream Configuration

Enter volume levels for voice call stream on Receiver. Use comma separated integers for min,max,preset from 1-5, e.g. 1,5,4

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiVolumeSVCRcvr

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

STREAM_VOICE_CALL on Speaker

   UI Configuration  >  Volume UI Profiles  >  Volume UI Profile  >  Stream Configuration

Enter volume levels for voice call stream on Speaker. Use comma separated integers for min,max,preset from 1-5, e.g. 1,5,4

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiVolumeSVCSpkr

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

STREAM_VOICE_CALL on Wired Headset

   UI Configuration  >  Volume UI Profiles  >  Volume UI Profile  >  Stream Configuration

Enter volume levels for voice call stream on Wired Headsets. Use comma separated integers for min,max,preset from 1-5, e.g. 1,5,4

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiVolumeSVCWH

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Decode Beep on Speaker/Wired and Bluetooth Headsets

   UI Configuration  >  Volume UI Profiles  >  Volume UI Profile  >  Stream Configuration

Enter volume levels for decode beep virtual volume on Speaker, Wired and Bluetooth Headsets. Use comma separated integers for min,max,preset from 0-10, e.g. 1,10,8

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiVolumeDecodeBeepSpkrWHBTH

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Keyboard Feedback on Speaker/Wired and Bluetooth Headsets

   UI Configuration  >  Volume UI Profiles  >  Volume UI Profile  >  Stream Configuration

Enter volume levels for keyboard feedback sound on Speaker, Wired and Bluetooth Headsets. Use comma separated integers for min,max,preset from 0-4, e.g. 1,4,2

Detail Information:

  • Key = uiVolumeKBFeedbackSpkrWHBTH

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.


Wireless and Network Configuration

Use this Group to configure Bluetooth, DHCP, Enterprise NFC, Ethernet, Host Name, RFID, Wireless General, Wireless LAN, and Wireless WAN.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessAndNetworkConfig

  • Type = bundle

Bluetooth Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Discoverability, New Pairings, Pairing Rules, Pairing Popup, Silent Pairing, Silent Pairing Default Method, Single Pairing, State, Blocked BLE Channels, Blocked RF-Based BLE Channels, and Beacon.

Detail Information:

  • Key = bluetoothConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 5.1.

Discoverability

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration

Select whether the device is Discoverable via Bluetooth.

Devices are NOT Discoverable via Bluetooth by default except when the Bluetooth Pairing screen of the Settings UI is active.

  • If the value Off is selected, the default behavior will be in effect and the device will not be Discoverable via Bluetooth except when the Bluetooth Pairing screen of the Settings UI is active.

  • If the value On is selected, the default behavior will be overridden and the device will be Discoverable via Bluetooth whenever Bluetooth is enabled (turned on).

Detail Information:

  • Key = btDiscoverability

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 6.2.

New Pairings

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration

Select whether the device will be Allowed to Accept new Bluetooth Pairings.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the device will NOT be Allowed to Accept new Bluetooth Pairings.

  • If the value Allow is selected, the device WILL be Allowed to Accept new Bluetooth Pairings.

Note that Zebra devices are configured by default to Accept new Bluetooth Pairings.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btNewPairings

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 
 Pair only trusted devices  3 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 5.1.

Pairing Rules

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Pairing Rule(s) that define non-default Behavior for Pairing Bluetooth Devices.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btpRule

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 9.3.

Pairing Rule

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Pairing Rules

Use this Sub-group to configure Name, Device Upper Address Part, MAC Address, Trusted Device Rule, Device Class, Silent Pairing Rule, Single Pairing Rule, Single Pairing Category, and Pairing PIN Code.

Detail Information:

  • Key = bluetoothRule

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Name

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Pairing Rules  >  Pairing Rule

Enter a name for a Bluetooth Rule.

Note that you can specify Name and/or MAC Address.

Detail Information:

  • Key = bluetoothRuleName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Device Upper Address Part

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Pairing Rules  >  Pairing Rule

Enter the Device Upper Address Part for a Bluetooth Rule.

When a Device Upper Address Part is specified for a rule, Bluetooth Silent Pairing will automatically complete new Bluetooth Pairings for Bluetooth devices that have the specified Device Upper Address Part in the upper part of their Bluetooth Address.

Detail Information:

  • Key = bluetoothRuleUpperAddressPart

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

MAC Address

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Pairing Rules  >  Pairing Rule

Enter the Bluetooth MAC Address XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX for a Bluetooth Rule.

Note that you can specify Name and/or MAC Address.

Detail Information:

  • Key = bluetoothRuleMACAddress

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Pie.

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Trusted Device Rule

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Pairing Rules  >  Pairing Rule

Select whether this is a trusted device rule.

  • If the value No is selected, the defined rule will NOT be considered a trusted device rule for pairing devices that satisfy the rule's parameters.

  • If the value Yes is selected, the defined rule will be considered a trusted device rule for pairing devices that satisfy the rule's parameters.

Detail Information:

  • Key = bluetoothRuleTrustedDevice

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 No  0 
 Yes  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Device Class

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Pairing Rules  >  Pairing Rule

Enter the Device Class for a Bluetooth Rule.

When a Device Class is specified for a rule, Bluetooth Silent Pairing will automatically complete new Bluetooth Pairings for Bluetooth devices that have the specified Device Class.

Detail Information:

  • Key = bluetoothRuleDeviceClass

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Silent Pairing Rule

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Pairing Rules  >  Pairing Rule

Select whether this is a silent pairing rule.

  • If the value No is selected, the defined rule will NOT allow pairing without operator interaction.

  • If the value Yes is selected, the defined rule will allow pairing without operator interaction.

Detail Information:

  • Key = bluetoothRuleSilentPairing

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 No  0 
 Yes  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Single Pairing Rule

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Pairing Rules  >  Pairing Rule

Select whether this is a single pairing rule.

  • If the value No is selected, the defined rule will allow any number of devices of the selected category to pair.

  • If the value Yesis selected, the defined rule will only allow one device of the selected category to pair.

Detail Information:

  • Key = bluetoothRuleSinglePairing

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 No  0 
 Yes  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Single Pairing Category

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Pairing Rules  >  Pairing Rule

Select the class of Bluetooth peripheral for which only a single pairing will be allowed.

Only one peripheral of the specified class will be permitted to pair.

  • If the value Headset is selected, only one Bluetooth headset will be permitted to pair at a time.

  • If the value Scanner is selected, only one Bluetooth scanner will be permitted to pair at a time.

  • If the value Printer is selected, only one Bluetooth printer will be permitted to pair at a time.

  • If the value Payment is selected, only one Bluetooth payment will be permitted to pair at a time.

  • If the value Dex is selected, only one Bluetooth Dex will be permitted to pair at a time.

Note that even when the device IS configured to permit only single Bluetooth Pairings, it WILL NOT do so unless Action is used to configure specific silent pairing rules that define how single pairing should occur.

Detail Information:

  • Key = bluetoothSinglePairingCategory

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Headset  1 
 Scanner  2 
 Printer  3 
 Payment  4 
 Dex  5 
 Custom_1  6 
 Custom_2  7 
 Custom_3  8 
 Custom_4  9 
 Custom_5  10 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Pairing PIN Code

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Pairing Rules  >  Pairing Rule

Enter the Pairing PIN Code for a Bluetooth Rule.

When a Pairing PIN Code is specified for a rule, and the device has a Bluetooth version prior to 2.1, Bluetooth Silent Pairing will automatically use the specified Pairing PIN Code to complete Bluetooth Silent Pairings enabled by the Silent Pairing Rule.

When the device has a Bluetooth version 2.1 or later, a Pairing PIN Code is not required to complete Bluetooth Silent Pairings enabled by the Silent Pairing Rule.

Detail Information:

  • Key = bluetoothRulePIN

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Pie.

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Pairing Popup

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration

Select whether a New Pairing Popup will be Allowed to be presented when an unpaired peripheral device attempts to establish a new Bluetooth pairing with a device.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, a New Pairing Popup will NOT be Allowed to be presented when an unpaired peripheral device attempts to establish a new Bluetooth pairing with a device.

  • If the value Allow is selected, a New Pairing Popup WILL be Allowed to be presented when an unpaired peripheral device attempts to establish a new Bluetooth pairing with a device.

Additional Details:

  • This option will have no effect on existing pairings.

  • This option will not prevent new pairings that are initiated from the device to the peripheral.

  • This option will not prevent new pairings from being established based on configured Silent Pairing rules.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btPairingPopup

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

Silent Pairing

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration

Select whether the device will be Allowed to perform Bluetooth pairings silently.

  • If the value Allow is selected, the device will NOT be Allowed to perform Bluetooth pairings silently.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the device WILL be Allowed to perform Bluetooth pairings silently.

Devices will silently perform Bluetooth Pairings by default.

Note that even when the device CAN silently perform Bluetooth Pairings, it WILL NOT do so unless Bluetooth Pairing Rules is used to configure specific silent pairing rules that define how silent pairing should occur.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btSilentPairingsState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Allow  1 
 Disallow  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 7.0.

Silent Pairing Default Method

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration

Select whether to allow silent pairing using only Zebra-defined peripherals.

Devices will silently perform Bluetooth Pairings by default.

  • If the value Do not change is selected, the then no change will be made to the method used as the default for silent pairings.

  • If the value Disable All is selected, silent pairing will be performed on NO devices.

  • If the value Enable with Zebra-defined peripherals only is selected, silent pairing will only be performed on Zebra defined devices only.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btSilentPairingDefMethod

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disable All  1 
 Enable with Zebra-defined peripherals only  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.5.

Single Pairing

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration

Select whether only one remote device of a certain category will be paired at a time.

Devices will allow more than one pairing of a category of device at a time by default.

  • If the value Allow is selected, the default behavior will be overridden and the device will only pair to one device of the specified category at a time.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the default behavior will be in effect and the device will pair to more than one device of any category at a time.

Note that even when the device CAN silently perform Bluetooth Pairings, it WILL NOT do so unless Bluetooth Pairing Rules is used to configure specific single pairing rules that define how single pairing should occur.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btSinglePairingsState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Allow  1 
 Disallow  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

State

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration

Select the Power State of the Bluetooth Radio.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

Blocked BLE Channels

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration

Enter the BLE channels to block separated by commas or high/low pairs separated by a dash. For example, 0-5,7,31-35.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btBLEBlockedChannels

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.1.

Blocked RF-Based BLE Channels

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration

Enter the RF-Based BLE channels to block separated by commas or high/low pairs separated by a dash. For example, 2414-2418,2420,2431-2453

Detail Information:

  • Key = btBLEBlockedRFChannels

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.1.

Beacon Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Airplane Mode State, Beaconing On Battery Reinsert, State, Type, Explicit Beacon UUID, AltBeacon, Custom Beacon, Custom Transmit Power Level, Transmit Power Level, Custom Transmit Interval, and Transmit Power Interval.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btBeaconConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Airplane Mode State

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Beacon Configuration

Select whether the emitting of Beacons while the Device is Powered Off will be conditioned based on whether Airplane Mode was On at the time the Device was powered Off.

This is only relevant when On is specified for Airplane Mode State.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btBeaconAirplaneModeState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Beaconing On Battery Reinsert

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Beacon Configuration

Select whether to emit beacon upon battery reinsertion while device is still powered off. By default, beacon will be emitted.

This is only relevant when On is specified for Airplane Mode State.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btBeaconingOnBatteryReinsert

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

State

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Beacon Configuration

Select whether a beacon will be emitted (on) or not (off) while the device display is turned off.

  • If the value Off is selected, a beacon will NOT be emitted when the device display is turned off.

  • If the value On is selected, a beacon WILL be emitted when the device display is turned off.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btBeaconState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Type

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Beacon Configuration

Select the Type of Beacon to be emitted.

  • If the value AltBeacon is selected, an AltBeacon style Beacon will be emitted.

  • If the value Custom is selected, a Custom style Beach will be emitted and Data must also be specified to define the Custom Beacon style.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btBeaconType

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 AltBeacon  2 
 Custom  3 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Explicit Beacon UUID

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Beacon Configuration

Select whether an explicit UUID will be used for the beacon when AltBeacon is specified for Type.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btExplicitBeaconUUID

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Off  0 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

AltBeacon Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Beacon Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure UUID, ID1, ID2, Manufacturing Byte, and Reference RSSI.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btAltBeaconConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

UUID

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Beacon Configuration  >  AltBeacon Configuration

Enter the UUID to use when On is specified for UUID and AltBeacon is specified for Type.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btAltBeaconUUID

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

ID1

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Beacon Configuration  >  AltBeacon Configuration

Enter the 4 hexadecimal characters to use for ID1 when AltBeacon is specified for Type. If nothing is entered, the value of EBEB will be used.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btAltBeaconMajorID

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

ID2

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Beacon Configuration  >  AltBeacon Configuration

Enter the 4 hexadecimal characters to use for ID2 when AltBeacon is specified for Type. If nothing is entered, the value of ECDD will be used.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btAltBeaconMinorID

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Manufacturing Byte

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Beacon Configuration  >  AltBeacon Configuration

Enter the 2 hexadecimal characters to use for the manufacturing byte when AltBeacon is specified for Type. If no value is entered, the default value of 00 will be used.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btAltBeaconMfgByte

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Reference RSSI

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Beacon Configuration  >  AltBeacon Configuration

Enter the 2 hexadecimal characters to used for the reference RSSI when AltBeacon is specified for Type. If no value is entered, a calculated value will be used.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btAltBeaconRefRSSI

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Custom Beacon Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Beacon Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Data.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btCustomBeaconConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Data

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Beacon Configuration  >  Custom Beacon Configuration

Enter the custom UUID/URL/DATA to use for the custom beacon type. Up to 56 hexadecimal characters that follow the Bluetooth SIG Advertising format may be used when Custom is specified for Type.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btCustomBeaconData

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Custom Transmit Power Level

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Beacon Configuration

Enter the power level (in dBm) of the beacons that will be sent while the device is powered off. Valid range is between -127 and 1.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btCustomBeaconXmitPower

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Transmit Power Level

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Beacon Configuration

Select the Power Level of the beacon that will be emitted while the device is powered off. If not selected, default value will be used (default values vary by device)

  • If the value High (1dBm) is selected, the transmit power level of the beacon will be set to 1dBm (maximum power)

  • If the value Medium (-7dBm) is selected, the transmit power level of the beacon will be set to -7dBm.

  • If the value Low Power (-15dBm) is selected, the transmit power level of the beacon will be set to -15dBm

  • If the value Ultra Low Power(-21dBm) is selected, the transmit power level of the beacon will be set to -21dBm

  • If the value Custom is selected a value between -127 and +1 (dBm) must be entered for Transmit Power Level

Detail Information:

  • Key = btBeaconXmitPower

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 High (1dBm)  1 
 Medium (-7dBm)  2 
 Low Power (-15dBm)  3 
 Ultra Low Power(-21dBm)  4 
 Custom  5 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Custom Transmit Interval

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Beacon Configuration

Enter the Interval between beacons that will be sent while the device is powered off. The valid range of values is between 100 and 10240 msec.

Detail Information:

  • Key = btCustomBeaconXmitInterval

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Transmit Power Interval

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Bluetooth Configuration  >  Beacon Configuration

Select the Interval between beacons that will be sent while the device is powered off. If not selected, default value will be used (default values vary by device)

  • If the value Low Latency (100 ms) is selected, the transmit interval between beacons will be set to 100msec (Low Latency)

  • If the value Balanced (250 ms) is selected, the transmit interval between beacons will be set to 250msec (Balanced)

  • If the value Low Power (1000 ms) is selected, the transmit interval between beacons will be set to 1000msec (Low Power)

  • If the value Custom is selected, the transmit interval between beacons will be set to the value specified in Transmit Interval

Detail Information:

  • Key = btBeaconXmitInterval

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Low Latency (100 ms)  1 
 Balanced (250 ms)  2 
 Low Power (1000 ms)  3 
 Custom  4 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

DHCP Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure DHCPV6, Request V4 Options, and Send V4 Options.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dhcpConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

DHCPV6

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  DHCP Configuration

Select whether to use DHCP V6 addresses

Detail Information:

  • Key = dhcpV6

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do Not Change   
 Turn On  0 
 Turn Off  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 10.3.

Request V4 Options

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  DHCP Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Request V4 Option(s).

Detail Information:

  • Key = dhcpRequestV4Options

  • Type = bundle_array

Request V4 Option

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  DHCP Configuration  >  Request V4 Options

Use this Sub-group to configure Request V4 Type.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dhcpRequestV4Option

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Request V4 Type

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  DHCP Configuration  >  Request V4 Options  >  Request V4 Option

Select the Type of DHCP Option to be Requested from the DHCP Server by the DHCP Client.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dhcpRequestV4Type

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 28 - Broadcast Address  28 
 42 - NTP Server  42 
 43 - Vendor Encapsulated Options  43 
 66 - TFTP Server Address  66 
 67 - Boot File Name  67 
 119 - Domain Search List  119 
 150 - TFTP Server Names  150 
 186 - Vendor Specific Option#1  186 
 188 - Vendor Specific Option#2  188 
 230 - Vendor Specific Option#3  230 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Send V4 Options

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  DHCP Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Send V4 Option(s).

Detail Information:

  • Key = dhcpSendV4Options

  • Type = bundle_array

Send V4 Option

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  DHCP Configuration  >  Send V4 Options

Use this Sub-group to configure Send V4 Flag Value, Send V4 Type, and Send V4 Value.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dhcpSendV4Option

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Send V4 Flag Value

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  DHCP Configuration  >  Send V4 Options  >  Send V4 Option

Enter the Flag Value to be attached to DHCP Option 81 Sent to the DHCP Server by the DHCP Client.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dhcpSendV4FlagValue

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 6.3.

Send V4 Type

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  DHCP Configuration  >  Send V4 Options  >  Send V4 Option

Select the Type of DHCP Option to be Sent to the DHCP Server by the DHCP Client.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dhcpSendV4Type

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 12 - Host Name  12 
 60 - Vendor Class  60 
 61 - Client Identifier Value  61 
 77 - User Class  77 
 81 - FQDN Flag  81 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Send V4 Value

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  DHCP Configuration  >  Send V4 Options  >  Send V4 Option

Enter the Value to be attached to a DHCP Option to be Sent to the DHCP Server by the DHCP Client.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dhcpSendV4Value

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Enterprise NFC Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure State, General NFC, and Tag.

Detail Information:

  • Key = nfcConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.3.

State

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Enterprise NFC Configuration

Select the Enterprise NFC State.

  • If the value Off is selected, Enterprise NFC will be turned Off.

  • If the value On is selected, Enterprise NFC will be turned On.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessNfcState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

General NFC Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Enterprise NFC Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Reset to Defaults, Logging, NFC Data Exchange Format (NDEF), Polling Mode, CPU Boost, Peer to Peer Mode, Card Emulation Mode, and Use on Lock Screen.

Detail Information:

  • Key = nfcGeneralConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.3.

Reset to Defaults

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Enterprise NFC Configuration  >  General NFC Configuration

Select whether the Enterprise NFC settings should all be reset to their default values.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessNfcResetToDefaults

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do Not Reset  false 
 Reset  true 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Logging

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Enterprise NFC Configuration  >  General NFC Configuration

Select whether logging should be used by Enterprise NFC

  • If the value Off is selected, Enterprise NFC will NOT capture logs.

  • If the value On is selected, Enterprise NFC will capture logs.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessNfcDebugLoggingState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Off  false 
 On  true 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.3.

NFC Data Exchange Format (NDEF)

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Enterprise NFC Configuration  >  General NFC Configuration

Select whether the Enterprise NFC should use NFC Data Exchange Format (NDEF).

  • If the value Do Not Use is selected, Enterprise NFC will NOT attempt tp read NDEF formatted tags. This could increase the speed of reading non-NDEF tags by not spending unnecessary time trying to interpret tag data according to NDEF formatting rules.

  • If the value Use is selected, Enterprise NFC will attempt to read NDEF formatted tags. This may decrease speed somewhat, compared to reading unformatted tags, but increases flexibility by allowing applications to receive tag data interpreted according to NDEF formatting rules. Starting in Android 11, support for NFC Data Exchange Format (NDEF) is deprecated.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessNfcUseNDEF

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do Not Use  false 
 Use  true 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Polling Mode

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Enterprise NFC Configuration  >  General NFC Configuration

Select the Enterprise NFC Polling Mode that should be used.

  • If the value Hybrid is selected, Enterprise NFC will poll in a manner designed to strike a reasonable balance between polling speed and battery life.

  • If the value Standard is selected, then Enterprise NFC will poll in a manner designed to maximize polling speed. This may increase battery drain but will reduce tag detection time.

  • If the value Low Power is selected, Enterprise NFC will poll in a manner designed to minimize impact on battery life. This may increase the overall tag detection time, but will reduce battery drain.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessNfcPollingMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Hybrid  2 
 Standard  1 
 Low Power  0 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

CPU Boost

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Enterprise NFC Configuration  >  General NFC Configuration

Select whether the Enterprise NFC should Boost CPU Speed during NFC transactions.

  • If the value Do Not Boost is selected, Enterprise NFC will leave the CPU Speed unmodified during NFC transactions.

  • If the value Boost is selected, Enterprise NFC will Boost the CPU Speed during NFC transactions to enhance performance of those transactions.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessNfcCpuBoost

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do Not Boost  false 
 Boost  true 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Peer to Peer Mode

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Enterprise NFC Configuration  >  General NFC Configuration

Select whether the Enterprise NFC should use Peer-to-Peer Mode. This is generally used when two NFC enabled devices want to communicate with each other to exchange data.

  • If the value Do Not Use is selected, Enterprise NFC will NOT use Peer-to-Peer Mode and hence will operate only in Read/Write Mode, unless it is also configured to operated in Card Emulation Mode by via Card Emulation Mode.

  • If the value Use is selected, Enterprise NFC will use Peer-to-Peer Mode and hence will operate in both Peer-to-Peer Mode and Read/Write Mode, and and optionally also in Card Emulation Mode, if configured via Card Emulation Mode.

Note that starting in Android 11, support for Peer-to-Peer Mode is deprecated.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessNfcPeerToPeerMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do Not Use  false 
 Use  true 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Card Emulation Mode

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Enterprise NFC Configuration  >  General NFC Configuration

Select whether the Enterprise NFC should use Card Emulation Mode. This is generally used when an NFC enabled device wants to emulate a Smart Card.

  • If the value Do Not Use is selected, Enterprise NFC will NOT use Card Emulation Mode and hence will operate only in Read/Write Mode, unless it is also configured to operated in Peer-to-Peer Mode by via Peer to Peer Mode.

  • If the value Use is selected, Enterprise NFC will use Card Emulation Mode and hence will operate in both Card Emulation Mode and Read/Write Mode and optionally also in Peer-to-Peer Mode, if configured via Peer to Peer Mode.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessNfcCardEmulationMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do Not Use  false 
 Use  true 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Use on Lock Screen

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Enterprise NFC Configuration  >  General NFC Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to Enterprise NFC from the Lock Screen.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to Enterprise NFC from the Lock Screen.

  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to Enterprise NFC from the Lock Screen.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessNfcUseOnLockScreen

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Disallow  false 
 Allow  true 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Tag Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Enterprise NFC Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Type A Tags, Type B Tags, Type F Tags, Type V Tags, Type A Tag Baud Rate, and Type B Tag Baud Rate.

Detail Information:

  • Key = nfcTagConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.3.

Type A Tags

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Enterprise NFC Configuration  >  Tag Configuration

Select whether the Enterprise NFC should read NFC Type A Tags.

  • If the value Do Not Read is selected, Enterprise NFC will NOT attempt to read NFC Type A Tags. This could increase the speed of reading other tag types in cases where Type A Tags are not used.

  • If the value Read is selected, Enterprise NFC will attempt to read NFC Type A Tags. This might decrease the speed of reading tags unless reading of other tag types is turned off.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessNfcReadTypeATags

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do Not Read  false 
 Read  true 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Type B Tags

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Enterprise NFC Configuration  >  Tag Configuration

Select whether the Enterprise NFC should read NFC Type B Tags.

  • If the value Do Not Read is selected, Enterprise NFC will NOT attempt to read NFC Type B Tags. This could increase the speed of reading other tag types in cases where Type B Tags are not used.

  • If the value Read is selected, Enterprise NFC will attempt to read NFC Type B Tags. This might decrease the speed of reading tags unless reading of other tag types is turned off.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessNfcReadTypeBTags

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do Not Read  false 
 Read  true 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Type F Tags

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Enterprise NFC Configuration  >  Tag Configuration

Select whether the Enterprise NFC should read NFC Type F Tags.

  • If the value Do Not Read is selected, Enterprise NFC will NOT attempt to read NFC Type F Tags. This could increase the speed of reading other tag types in cases where Type F Tags are not used.

  • If the value Read is selected, Enterprise NFC will attempt to read NFC Type F Tags. This might decrease the speed of reading tags unless reading of other tag types is turned off.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessNfcReadTypeFTags

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do Not Read  false 
 Read  true 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Type V Tags

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Enterprise NFC Configuration  >  Tag Configuration

Select whether the Enterprise NFC should read NFC Type V Tags.

  • If the value Do Not Read is selected, Enterprise NFC will NOT attempt to read NFC Type V Tags. This could increase the speed of reading other tag types in cases where Type V Tags are not used.

  • If the value Read is selected, Enterprise NFC will attempt to read NFC Type V Tags. This might decrease the speed of reading tags unless reading of other tag types is turned off.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessNfcReadTypeVTags

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do Not Read  false 
 Read  true 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Type A Tag Baud Rate

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Enterprise NFC Configuration  >  Tag Configuration

Select the Baud Rate that Enterprise NFC should use for Type A Tags.

  • If the value 106 kbps is selected, Enterprise NFC will always communicate to Type A Tags using a Baud Rate of 106 kbps.

  • If the value 212 kbps is selected, Enterprise NFC will communicate to Type A Tags using a Baud Rate of 106 kbps or 212 kbps, depending on the Baud Rate supported by the tag.

  • If the value 424 kbps is selected, Enterprise NFC will communicate to Type A Tags using a Baud Rate of 106 kbps, 212 kbps, or 424 kbps, depending on the Baud Rate supported by the tag.

  • If the value Any is selected, Enterprise NFC will communicate to Type A Tags using any available (automatically selected) Baud Rate supported by the tag.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessNfcTypeABaudRate

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 106 kbps  1 
 212 kbps  16 
 424 kbps  32 
 Any  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Type B Tag Baud Rate

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Enterprise NFC Configuration  >  Tag Configuration

Select the Baud Rate that Enterprise NFC should use for Type B Tags.

  • If the value 106 kbps is selected, Enterprise NFC will always communicate to Type B Tags using a Baud Rate of 106 kbps.

  • If the value 212 kbps is selected, Enterprise NFC will communicate to Type B Tags using a Baud Rate of 106 kbps or 212 kbps, depending on the Baud Rate supported by the tag.

  • If the value 424 kbps is selected, Enterprise NFC will communicate to Type B Tags using a Baud Rate of 106 kbps, 212 kbps, or 424 kbps, depending on the Baud Rate supported by the tag.

  • If the value Any is selected, Enterprise NFC will communicate to Type B Tags using any available (automatically selected) Baud Rate supported by the tag.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessNfcTypeBBaudRate

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 106 kbps  4 
 212 kbps  64 
 424 kbps  128 
 Any  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Ethernet Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure State, User Control of State, IP Address, and Proxy.

Detail Information:

  • Key = ethernetConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 6.2.

State

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Ethernet Configuration

Select whether Ethernet Power will be turned on or off.

A given device may or may not support an Ethernet Adapter. An attempt to configure the Ethernet Adapter on a device that does not have one will result in an error.

Detail Information:

  • Key = netEthernetState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.4.

User Control of State

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Ethernet Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to control the Ethernet Power State.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to control the Ethernet Power State.

  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to control the Ethernet Power State.

Note that a given device may or may not support an Ethernet Adapter. An attempt to configure the Ethernet Adapter on a device that does not have one will result in an error.

Detail Information:

  • Key = netEthernetStateControlByUser

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.4.

IP Address Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Ethernet Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Type, Static IP Address, Static Gateway Address, Static Network Mask, Static Primary DNS, and Static Secondary DNS.

Detail Information:

  • Key = netEthernetIpAddrConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 6.2.

Type

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Ethernet Configuration  >  IP Address Configuration

Select how an IP Address will be assigned to the Ethernet adapter.

  • If the value Static (Manual) is selected, an IP Address for the Ethernet adapter will be automatically acquired by the DHCP Client from the DHCP Server.

  • If the value Dynamic (DHCP) is selected, an IP Address for the Ethernet adapter will be assigned based on the values selected for IP Address, Gateway Address, Network Mask, Primary DNS, and Secondary DNS, which you must also specify to provide the required values.

Note that a given device may or may not support an Ethernet Adapter. An attempt to configure the Ethernet Adapter on a device that does not have one will result in an error.

Detail Information:

  • Key = netEthernetIpAddrType

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Dynamic (DHCP)  1 
 Static (Manual)  0 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Static IP Address

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Ethernet Configuration  >  IP Address Configuration

Enter the IP Address to be assigned to the Ethernet adapter.

A given device may or may not support an Ethernet Adapter. An attempt to configure the Ethernet Adapter on a device that does not have one will result in an error.

Detail Information:

  • Key = netEthernetIpStaticIpAddress

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Static Gateway Address

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Ethernet Configuration  >  IP Address Configuration

Enter the Gateway Address to be assigned to the Ethernet adapter.

A given device may or may not support an Ethernet Adapter. An attempt to configure the Ethernet Adapter on a device that does not have one will result in an error.

Detail Information:

  • Key = netEthernetIpStaticGatewayAddress

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Static Network Mask

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Ethernet Configuration  >  IP Address Configuration

Enter the Network Mask to be assigned to the Ethernet adapter.

A given device may or may not support an Ethernet Adapter. An attempt to configure the Ethernet Adapter on a device that does not have one will result in an error.

Detail Information:

  • Key = netEthernetIpStaticNetworkMask

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Static Primary DNS

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Ethernet Configuration  >  IP Address Configuration

Enter the Primary DNS Server Address to be assigned to the Ethernet adapter.

A given device may or may not support an Ethernet Adapter. An attempt to configure the Ethernet Adapter on a device that does not have one will result in an error.

Detail Information:

  • Key = netEthernetIpStaticDNS1

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Static Secondary DNS

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Ethernet Configuration  >  IP Address Configuration

Enter the Secondary DNS Server Address to be assigned to the Ethernet adapter.

A given device may or may not support an Ethernet Adapter. An attempt to configure the Ethernet Adapter on a device that does not have one will result in an error.

Detail Information:

  • Key = netEthernetIpStaticDNS2

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Proxy Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Ethernet Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure State, Port, Server, and Bypass List.

Detail Information:

  • Key = netEthernetProxyConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 6.2.

State

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Ethernet Configuration  >  Proxy Configuration

Select whether a Proxy Server should be used to access the Internet from the network accessed via the Ethernet Adapter.

When specifying that a Proxy Server is to be used, you should specify Proxy Server, Port, and Bypass List together whenever Ethernet Proxy Server configuration is performed to help ensure that all three three values are properly synchronized.

A given device may or may not support an Ethernet Adapter. An attempt to configure the Ethernet Adapter on a device that does not have one will result in an error.

Detail Information:

  • Key = netEthernetProxyState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Use a Proxy Server  2 
 Do NOT Use a Proxy Server  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Port

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Ethernet Configuration  >  Proxy Configuration

Enter the Port that will be used to reach the Proxy Server to access the Internet from the network accessed via the Ethernet Adapter.

You should specify Proxy Server, Port, and Bypass List whenever Ethernet Proxy Server configuration is performed to help ensure that all three three values are properly synchronized.

A given device may or may not support an Ethernet Adapter. An attempt to configure the Ethernet Adapter on a device that does not have one will result in an error.

Detail Information:

  • Key = netEthernetProxyServerPort

  • Type = integer

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Server

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Ethernet Configuration  >  Proxy Configuration

Enter the Proxy Server used to access the Internet from the network accessed via the Ethernet Adapter.

While it is not mandatory, you should specify Proxy Server, Port, and Bypass List whenever Ethernet Proxy Server configuration is performed to help ensure that all three three values are properly synchronized.

A given device may or may not support an Ethernet Adapter. An attempt to configure the Ethernet Adapter on a device that does not have one will result in an error.

Detail Information:

  • Key = netEthernetProxyServer

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Bypass List

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Ethernet Configuration  >  Proxy Configuration

Enter the Proxy Server Bypass List which specifies addresses that should bypass the Proxy Server used to access the Internet from the network accessed via the Ethernet Adapter.

While it is not mandatory, you should specify Proxy Server, Port, and Bypass List whenever Ethernet Proxy Server configuration is performed to help ensure that all three three values are properly synchronized.

A given device may or may not support an Ethernet Adapter. An attempt to configure the Ethernet Adapter on a device that does not have one will result in an error.

Detail Information:

  • Key = netEthernetProxyServerBypassList

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Host Name Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Device Friendly Name and Device Network Name.

Detail Information:

  • Key = hostConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 5.1.

Device Friendly Name

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Host Name Configuration

Enter the name by which a device will be known on the network.

Detail Information:

  • Key = netDeviceFriendlyName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Device Network Name

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Host Name Configuration

Enter the name by which a device will be known on the network.

Detail Information:

  • Key = netHostDeviceName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

RFID Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Update Firmware File, Country of Operation, Channel Hopping, Channel Mask, Ukraine Region Power Mode, Query Select, Query Session, Query Target, and Transmit Power Level.

Detail Information:

  • Key = rfidConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Update Firmware File

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  RFID Configuration

Enter the path and file name of the file containing the firmware update to be applied.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessRfidUpdateFirmwareFile

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Country of Operation

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  RFID Configuration

Select the Country of Operation in which the RFID module will be used.

It is critical that the Country of Operation be set at least once, since the RFID module has no default Country of Operation and will not operate unless/until the Country of Operation is explicitly set, to ensure that country-specific regulator requirements are met.

In most cases, the Country of Operation will be set once and never changed, unless the device is physically relocated to a different country.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessRfidCountryOfOperation

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 ALBANIA  1 
 ANDORRA  2 
 ARGENTINA  3 
 AUSTRALIA  4 
 BANGLADESH  5 
 BHUTAN  6 
 BOLIVIA  7 
 BOSNIA_HERZENGOVINA  8 
 BRAZIL  9 
 CANADA  10 
 CAMBODIA  11 
 CHILE  12 
 CHINA  13 
 COLOMBIA  14 
 DOMINICAN_REPUBLIC  15 
 ECUADOR  16 
 EL_SALVADOR  17 
 UNITED_KINGDOM  18 
 GUATEMALA  19 
 GUAM  20 
 HONG_KONG  21 
 INDIA  22 
 INDONESIA  23 
 JAPAN_1W_LBT  24 
 JAPAN_250MW  25 
 LAOS_EU  26 
 LAOS_FCC  27 
 MACAU  28 
 MACEDONIA  29 
 MALAYSIA  30 
 MEXICO  31 
 MONACO  32 
 MOTENEGRO  33 
 NEW_ZEALAND_FCC  34 
 NEW_ZEALAND_EU  35 
 PAKISTAN  36 
 PANAMA  37 
 PARAGUAY  38 
 PERU  39 
 PHILIPPINES  40 
 PUERTO_RICO  41 
 RUSSIA  42 
 SAUDI_ARABIA  43 
 SINGAPORE  44 
 SOUTH_AFRICA  45 
 SOUTH_KOREA  46 
 SRI_LANKA  47 
 TAIWAN  48 
 THAILAND  49 
 TURKEY  50 
 UAE  51 
 UNITED_STATES  52 
 URUGUAY  53 
 VENEZUELA  54 
 VIETNAM  55 
 VIRGINIA_ISLAND  56 
 ETSI 302.208 compliant generic  57 
 FCC Part-16 compliant generic  58 
 ISRAEL  59 
 ALGERIA  60 
 ARMENIA  61 
 AUSTRIA  62 
 AZERBAIJAN  63 
 BAHRAIN  64 
 BELGIUM  65 
 BULGARIA  66 
 COSTA_RICA  67 
 CROATIA  68 
 CYPRUS  69 
 CZECH_REPUBLIC  70 
 DENMARK  71 
 EGYPT  72 
 ESTONIA  73 
 FINLAND  74 
 FRANCE  75 
 GEORGIA  76 
 GERMANY  77 
 GREECE  78 
 HUNGARY  79 
 ICELAND  80 
 IRELAND  81 
 ITALY  82 
 JORDAN  83 
 KAZAKHSTAN  84 
 KUWAIT  85 
 LATVIA  86 
 LITHUANIA  87 
 LUXEMBOURG  88 
 MALTA  89 
 NETHERLANDS  90 
 NORWAY  91 
 OMAN  92 
 POLAND  93 
 PORTUGAL  94 
 QATAR  95 
 ROMANIA  96 
 SERBIA  97 
 SLOVAKIA  98 
 SLOVENIA  99 
 SPAIN  100 
 SWEDEN  101 
 SWITZERLAND  102 
 TUNISIA  103 
 UKRAINE  104 
 ANGUILLA  106 
 MOROCCO  107 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

Channel Hopping

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  RFID Configuration

Select whether Channel Hopping will be performed among the Channels that are used by the RFID module.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessRfidCountryOfOperationChannelHopping

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Off  0 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Channel Mask

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  RFID Configuration

Enter the Channel Mask that determines which of the Channels that are allowed, based on the currently selected Country of Operation, will be used by the RFID module.

  • If no Channel Mask is specified, the RFID module will be free to use any or all Channels that are available based on the currently selected Country of Operation.

  • If a Channel Mask is specified, the specified value must consist of one or more Channel Numbers, separated by commas if more than one is specified, which identify the Channels that can be used. The RFID module will limit itself to just the Channels that are allowed for the currently selected Country of Operation AND that are in the set of Channels specified.

Note that you should consult the product documentation for the device being used to obtain the set of allowable Channel Numbers for that device.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessRfidCountryOfOperationChannelMask

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Ukraine Region Power Mode

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  RFID Configuration

Select the Ukraine Region specific power mode to be used by the RFID module.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessRfidCountryOfOperationUkraineRegionPowerMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 License free 100MW power-mode  0 
 Licensed 2W power-mode  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.1.

Query Select

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  RFID Configuration

Select which RFID tags should be operated upon by the RFID module during a Query Operation, based on the state of the SL flag.

  • If the value Query applies to all tags is selected, when the RFID module performs a Query Operation, it will consider all RFID tags that are currently visible to the RFID module.

  • If the value Query applies to tags with SL de-asserted is selected, when the RFID module performs a Query Operation, it will consider only those RFID tags that are currently visible to the RFID module AND that have SL flag de-asserted (i.e tags for which the SL flag has NOT been set using the Select command).

  • If the value Query applies to tags with SL asserted is selected, when the RFID module performs a Query Operation, it will consider only those RFID tags that are currently visible to the RFID module AND that have SL flag asserted (i.e tags for which the SL flag HAS been set using the Select command).

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessRfidQuerySelect

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Query applies to all tags  0 
 Query applies to tags with SL de-asserted  2 
 Query applies to tags with SL asserted  3 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

Query Session

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  RFID Configuration

Select the Session that will be used by the RFID module to access RFID tags during a Query Operation.

Allowable values are SessionS0, SessionS1, SessionS2, and SessionS3.

Sessions provide options for how to count tags. For more information on the use of Sessions, consult the device product documentation.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessRfidQuerySession

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 SessionS0  0 
 SessionS1  1 
 SessionS2  2 
 SessionS3  3 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

Query Target

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  RFID Configuration

Select how the A and B flags of RFID tags should be handled by the RFID module during a Query Operation.

  • If the value Inventory Target Flag A is selected, when the RFID module performs a Query Operation, it will consider only those RFID tags that are currently visible to the RFID module AND that are in State A.

  • If the value Inventory Target Flag B is selected, when the RFID module performs a Query Operation, it will consider only those RFID tags that are currently visible to the RFID module AND that are in State B.

  • If the value AB Flip is selected, when the RFID module performs a Query Operation, it will consider only those RFID tags that are currently visible to the RFID module AND that are in either State A or State B and will Flip the State from A to B or B to A for the session.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessRfidQueryTarget

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Inventory Target Flag A  0 
 Inventory Target Flag B  1 
 AB Flip  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

Transmit Power Level

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  RFID Configuration

Enter the RFID Power Level that should be used by the RFID module when transmitting.

The RFID Power Level should be specified in tenths of dBm in the range of 0 to 300, inclusive.

For example, to specify an RFID Power Level of 29.5 dBm, specify a value of 295.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessRfidTransmitPowerLevel

  • Type = integer

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

Wireless General Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Antenna Selection, Bluetooth Scanning State, GPS Power State, Location State, Network Monitored Popup, and Wi-Fi Scanning State.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Antenna Selection

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless General Configuration

Select which of multiple antennas should be used for wireless communications.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessConfigAntennaSelection

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Internal  1 
 External  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 7.1.

Bluetooth Scanning State

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless General Configuration

Select whether Bluetooth scanning is to be used to improve location

  • If the value Turn On is selected, system apps and services will detect Bluetooth devices and use them to improve location.

  • If the value Turn Off is selected, system apps and services will not detect Bluetooth devices and will not use them to improve location.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessConfigGpsBluetoothScanning

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Turn On  1 
 Turn Off  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.4.

GPS Power State

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless General Configuration

Select whether the GPS radio state should be On or Off.

  • If the value Off is selected, the GPS radio state will be turned off, preventing GPS-based location detection from being performed.

  • If the value On is selected, the GPS radio state will be turned on, allowing GPS-based location detection to be performed, given satellite availability.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessConfigGpsPowerState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

Location State

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless General Configuration

Select whether to use location services.

  • If the value Turn On is selected, location services will be active.

  • If the value Turn Off is selected, location services will not be active.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessConfigLocationState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Turn On  1 
 Turn Off  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.4.

Network Monitored Popup

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless General Configuration

Select whether a Popup informing the User that their network may be monitored will be Allowed to be displayed.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, a Popup informing the User that their network may be monitored will NOT be Allowed to be displayed.

  • If the value Allow is selected, a Popup informing the User that their network may be monitored WILL be Allowed to be displayed.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessConfigNetworkMayBeMonitoredPopup

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 6.1.

Wi-Fi Scanning State

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless General Configuration

Select whether Wi-Fi scanning is to be used to improve location

  • If the value Turn On is selected, system apps and services will detect Wi-Fi networks and use them to improve location.

  • If the value Turn Off is selected, system apps and services will not detect Wi-Fi networks and will not use them to improve location.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wirelessConfigGpsWifiScanning

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Turn On  1 
 Turn Off  2 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.4.

Wireless LAN Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Auto Wakeup, Country, Network Notification, RF Bands, State, Verbose Logging, Advanced Options, Diagnostics Options, Fine Timing Measurement (FTM), Global Proxy, and Hotspot.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanConfig

  • Type = bundle

Auto Wakeup

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration

Select whether Wi-Fi (not the device) should Wake Up (turn on) automatically when the presence of a previously connected network is detected.

  • If the value Off is selected, automatic Wake Up will be turned OFF, preventing the device from detecting the presence of a previously connected network and automatically waking up to connect to it.

  • If the value On is selected, automatic Wake Up will be turned ON, allowing the device to periodically scan for and detect the presence of a previously connected network and automatically wake up to connect to it.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanAutoWakeup

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Off  0 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 9.1.

Country

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration

Select the Country in which the WLAN subsystem will operate on a device:

  • If the value Auto (Use 802.11d) is selected, the Country to be used will be determined automatically.

  • When any other value is selected, the specified Country will be used.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanCountry

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Auto (Use 802.11d)  AUTO 
 Algeria  DZ 
 Anguilla  AI 
 Argentina  AR 
 Australia  AU 
 Austria  AT 
 Azerbaijan  AZ 
 Bahamas  BS 
 Bahrain  BH 
 Bangladesh  BD 
 Barbados  BB 
 Belarus  BY 
 Belgium  BE 
 Bermuda  BM 
 Bolivia  BO 
 Bonaire  BQ 
 Bosnia and Herzegovina  BA 
 Brazil  BR 
 Bulgaria  BG 
 Canada  CA 
 Cayman Islands  KY 
 Chile  CL 
 China  CN 
 Christmas Island  CX 
 Columbia  CO 
 Costa Rica  CR 
 Croatia  HR 
 Curacao  CW 
 Cyprus  CY 
 Czech Republic  CZ 
 Denmark  DK 
 Dominican Republic  DO 
 Ecuador  EC 
 Egypt  EG 
 El Salvador  SV 
 Estonia  EE 
 Falkland Islands(Malvinas)  FK 
 Finland  FI 
 France  FR 
 French Guiana  GF 
 Germany  DE 
 Ghana  GH 
 Gibraltar  GI 
 Greece  GR 
 Guadelope  GP 
 Guam  GU 
 Guatemala  GT 
 Guernsey  GG 
 Guyana  GY 
 Haiti  HT 
 Honduras  HN 
 HongKong  HK 
 Hungary  HU 
 Iceland  IS 
 India  IN 
 Indonesia  ID 
 Ireland  IE 
 Israel  IL 
 Italy  IT 
 Jamaica  JM 
 Japan  JP 
 Jordan  JO 
 Kazakhstan  KZ 
 Kenya  KE 
 Korea Republic  KR 
 Kosovo  XK 
 Kuwait  KW 
 Kyrgyzstan  KG 
 Latvia  LV 
 Lebanon  LB 
 Liechtenstein  LI 
 Lithuania  LT 
 Luxembourg  LU 
 Macedonia  MK 
 Malaysia  MY 
 Malta  MT 
 Martinique  MQ 
 Mexico  MX 
 Moldova  MD 
 Montenegro  ME 
 Morocco  MA 
 Netherlands  AN 
 Netherlands  NL 
 NewZeaLand  NZ 
 Nicaragua  NI 
 Nigeria  NG 
 Niue  NU 
 Norfolk Islands  NF 
 Northern Marina Islands  MP 
 Norway  NO 
 Oman  OM 
 Pakistan  PK 
 Panama  PA 
 Paraguay  PY 
 Peru  PE 
 Philippines  PH 
 Poland  PL 
 Portugal  PT 
 Puerto Rico  PR 
 Qatar  QA 
 Romania  RO 
 Russian Federation  RU 
 St. Maarten  SX 
 Saudi Arabia  SA 
 Senegal  SN 
 Serbia  RS 
 Singapore  SG 
 Slovakia  SK 
 Slovenia  SI 
 South Africa  ZA 
 Spain  ES 
 Sri Lanka  LK 
 Sweden  SE 
 Switzerland  CH 
 Taiwan  TW 
 Thailand  TH 
 Trinidad and Tobago  TT 
 Tunisia  TN 
 Turkey  TR 
 Uganda  UG 
 Ukraine  UA 
 United Arab Emirates  AE 
 United Kingdom  GB 
 U.S.A.  US 
 Uruguay  UY 
 Venezuela  VE 
 Vietnam  VN 
 Virgin Islands(British)  VG 
 Virgin Islands(US)  VI 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 4.1.

Network Notification

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration

Select whether the User will be notified about, and allowed to connect to, new WLANs that are detected.

  • If the value Off is selected, the User will NOT be notified about, nor allowed to connect to, new WLANs that are detected.

  • If the value On is selected, the User WILL be notified about, and allowed to connect to, new WLANs that are detected.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanNetworkNotification

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.1.

RF Bands

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Bands, 2.4GHz Channels, 5.0GHz Channels, and 6.0GHz Channels.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanConfigRFBands

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.5.

Bands

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  RF Bands

Select the Frequency Bands on which the WLAN subsystem will operate.

  • If the value 2.4GHz is selected, the WLAN subsystem will operate only on the 2.4 Gigahertz (Ghz) Frequency Band (used by 802.11b and 802.11g).

  • If the value 5.0GHz is selected, the WLAN subsystem will operate only on the 5.0 Gigahertz (Ghz) Frequency Band (used by 802.11a).

  • If the value 6.0GHz is selected, the WLAN subsystem will operate only on the 6.0 Gigahertz (Ghz) Frequency Band (used by 802.11ax).

  • If the value Auto is selected, WLAN subsystem will Automatically determine the Frequency Bands on which to operate.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wcRFBands

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 2.4GHz  2.4GHz 
 5.0GHz  5.0GHz 
 6.0GHz  6.0GHz 
 2.4GHz and 5.0GHz  2.4and5.0GHz 
 5.0GHz and 6.0GHz  5.0and6.0GHz 
 2.4GHz and 6.0GHz  2.4and6.0GHz 
 Auto  Auto 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.5.

2.4GHz Channels

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  RF Bands

Enter the channels to use when Auto or 2.4GHz is selected for Bands.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wcRF24

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.5.

5.0GHz Channels

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  RF Bands

Enter the channels to use when Auto or 5.0GHz is selected for Bands.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wcRF50

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.5.

6.0GHz Channels

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  RF Bands

Enter the channels to use when Auto or 6.0GHz is selected for Bands.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wcRF60

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.5.

State

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration

Select whether the WLAN power should be turned on or off

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do Not Change   
 Off  0 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.1.

Verbose Logging

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration

Select whether the Verbose Logging feature of the WLAN adapter should be turned ON or OFF on a device.

  • If the value Off is selected, the Verbose Logging will be turned OFF, preventing the device from logging additional information for debugging or troubleshooting WLAN issues.

  • If the value On is selected, the Verbose Logging will be turned ON, allowing the device to log additional information for debugging or troubleshooting WLAN issues.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanVerboseLogging

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Off  0 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.3.

Advanced Options

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Advanced Option(s).

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanAdvancedOptions

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 8.4.

Advanced Option

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Advanced Options

Use this Sub-group to configure Name, Custom Name, and Value.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanAdvancedOptionPair

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Name

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Advanced Options  >  Advanced Option

Select a standard name that identifies a single advanced option to be configured for the WLAN adapter on a device. You must also specify Value to provide the value to be set for the advanced option identified by the selected name.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanAdvancedOptionName

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 AutoTimeConfig  AutoTimeConfig 
 HFSR  HFSR 
 CCKM  CCKM 
 FT  FT 
 FTRIC  FTRIC 
 OKC  OKC 
 PMKID  PMKID 
 PreAuth  PreAuth 
 PowerSave  PowerSave 
 WLANPowerSave  WLANPowerSave 
 AdvancedLogging  AdvancedLogging 
 FIPS  FIPS 
 EnableRestrictedSettingsUI  EnableRestrictedSettingsUI 
 802.11K  802.11K 
 802.11w  802.11w 
 802.11ac  802.11ac 
 802.11n  802.11n 
 802.11v  802.11v 
 BandPreference  BandPreference 
 FTOverTheDS  FTOverTheDS 
 AggregatedFT  AggregatedFT 
 ScanAssist  ScanAssist 
 CHD  CHD 
 SubNetRoam  SubNetRoam 
 WANCountry  WANCountry 
 PasswordProtectEncryption  PasswordProtectEncryption 
 MACRandomization  MACRandomization 
 CallAdmissionControl  CallAdmissionControl 
 EnableAmpdu  EnableAmpdu 
 GratuitousARP  GratuitousARP 
 ChannelBondingMode2g  ChannelBondingMode2g 
 WLANExtendedConfig  WLANExtendedConfig 
 RoamRSSIThreshold  RoamRSSIThreshold 
 RoamRSSIDelta  RoamRSSIDelta 
 MandateServerCertificate  MandateServerCertificate 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Custom Name

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Advanced Options  >  Advanced Option

Enter a custom Name that identifies a single advanced option to be configured for the WLAN adapter on a device. You must also specify Value to provide the value to be set for the advanced option identified by the specified name.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanAdvancedOptionCustomName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Value

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Advanced Options  >  Advanced Option

Enter a value for a single advanced option to be configured for the WLAN adapter on a device and should be specified when Name or Custom Name are specified to provide the name of the advanced option.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanAdvancedOptionValue

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Diagnostics Options

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Diagnostics Option(s).

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanDiagnosticsOptions

  • Type = bundle_array

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.4.

Diagnostics Option

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Diagnostics Options

Use this Sub-group to configure Name, Custom Name, and Value.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanDiagnosticsOptionPair

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Name

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Diagnostics Options  >  Diagnostics Option

Select a Name that identifies a single standard Diagnostic Option to be configured for the WLAN adapter on a device. You must also specify Value to provide the value to be set for the Diagnostic Option identified by the specified name.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanDiagnosticsOptionName

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 FusionAdvancedLogging  FusionAdvancedLogging 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Custom Name

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Diagnostics Options  >  Diagnostics Option

Enter a custom name that identifies a single Diagnostic Option to be configured for the WLAN adapter on a device. You must also specify Value to provide the value to be set for the Diagnostic Option identified by the specified name.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanDiagnosticsOptionCustomName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Value

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Diagnostics Options  >  Diagnostics Option

Enter a value for a single Diagnostic Option to be configured for the WLAN adapter on a device. You must also specify Name or Name Custom to provide the name that identifies the Diagnostic Option to be set.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanDiagnosticsOptionValue

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

Fine Timing Measurement (FTM) Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure AP Deployment File, AP Source, Deployment Mode, State, and Update Mode.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanFTM

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

AP Deployment File

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Fine Timing Measurement (FTM) Configuration

Enter the AP Target path and file name which contains the AP coordinates used Fine Timing Measurement (FTM) used by the WLAN adapter.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanFTMAPFile

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

AP Source

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Fine Timing Measurement (FTM) Configuration

Select the AP Source for Fine Timing Measurement (FTM) used by the WLAN adapter.

  • if Location XML is selected, then AP Deployment File must also be entered.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanFTMAPSource

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Location XML  0 
 Location from LCR/LCI  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Deployment Mode

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Fine Timing Measurement (FTM) Configuration

Select the deployment mode for Fine Timing Measurement (FTM) used by the WLAN adapter.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanFTMDeploymentMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Standard (FTM enabled)  0 
 Enhanced Infra (FTM-enabled)  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

State

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Fine Timing Measurement (FTM) Configuration

Select whether to turn on (enable) or off (disable) Fine Timing Measurement (FTM) used by the WLAN adapter.

  • If turned on (enabled) be sure to also specify Deployment Mode to provide the FTM mode to use and AP Source to provide the AP location source.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanFTMEnable

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Off  1 
 On  0 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Update Mode

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Fine Timing Measurement (FTM) Configuration

Select whether to use the standard update mode or a custom update mode. If custom is used, the device operator will be required to set a value.

  • If Standard is selected, the device will get location updates in 5 second intervals.

  • If Custom is selected, the device will get location updates in the interval selected on-device by the device operator. 1 second interval is the minimum.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanFTMLocationUpdateMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Standard  0 
 Custom  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 11.9.

Global Proxy Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure State, Host Name, Port, and Bypass.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanGlobalProxyConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.4.

State

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Global Proxy Configuration

Select whether a global proxy should be used.

  • If the value On is selected, then the global proxy defined in Host Name, Port, and Bypass will be used.

  • If the value Off is selected, then no global proxy will be used.

Detail Information:

  • Key = gpcState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 On  1 
 Off  0 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.4.

Host Name

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Global Proxy Configuration

Enter a Host Name (URL or IP address) of the Global Proxy server

Detail Information:

  • Key = gpcHostName

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.4.

Port

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Global Proxy Configuration

Enter the port number of the Global Proxy Server.

Detail Information:

  • Key = gpcPort

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.4.

Bypass

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Global Proxy Configuration

Enter the host name(s) and/or IP address(es) of devices that should bypass the Global Proxy server. Use comma(s) to separate multiple names. Ex: www.myBypassProxy.com, 192.168.1.100

Detail Information:

  • Key = gpcBypass

  • Type = string

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 11.4.

Hotspot Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Hotspot State, SSID, 2.4GHz Channel, 5GHz Channel, Band, Security Mode, and Security Passphrase.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanHotSpotOptions

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 6.3.

Hotspot State

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Hotspot Configuration

Select the state of the Hotspot Mode of the WLAN adapter on a device.

  • If the value Off is selected, the Hotspot Mode will be turned OFF, preventing the device from sharing its Internet connection as a WLAN Hotspot. Any other existing configuration related to Hotspot Mode will not be affected, allowing Hotspot Mode to be configured and tested, turned OFF and back ON without having to reconfigure it.

  • If the value On is selected, the Hotspot Mode will be turned ON, allowing the device to share its Internet connection as a WLAN Hotspot, subject to appropriate configuration related to Hotspot Mode.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanHotSpotState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Off  0 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

SSID

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Hotspot Configuration

Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) that will identify the network supported in Hotspot Mode of the WLAN adapter on a device.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanHotSpotSSID

  • Type = string

2.4GHz Channel

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Hotspot Configuration

Select the single 2.4 HGHz Channel in which Hotspot Mode of the WLAN adapter will operate on a device and should be specified when the value 2.4GHz is selected for Band.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanHotSpot24GHzChannel

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 1  1 
 2  2 
 3  3 
 4  4 
 5  5 
 6  6 
 7  7 
 8  8 
 9  9 
 10  10 
 11  11 
 12  12 
 13  13 

5GHz Channel

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Hotspot Configuration

Select the single 5.0 HGHz Channel in which Hotspot Mode of the WLAN adapter will operate on a device when the value 5GHz is selected for Band.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanHotSpotBand5GhzChannel

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 36  36 
 40  40 
 44  44 
 48  48 
 52  52 
 56  56 
 60  60 
 64  64 
 100  100 
 104  104 
 108  108 
 112  112 
 116  116 
 120  120 
 124  124 
 128  128 
 132  132 
 136  136 
 140  140 
 149  149 
 153  153 
 157  157 
 161  161 
 165  165 

Band

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Hotspot Configuration

Select the Frequency Band in which Hotspot Mode of the WLAN adapter will operate on a device.

  • If the value 2.4GHz is selected, the Hotspot Mode of the WLAN adapter will operate solely in the 2.4 Gigahertz (GHz) Frequency Band and hence only devices capable of operating in that Frequency Band will be capable of sharing the Internet connection of the device via Hotspot Mode.

  • If the value 5GHz is selected, the Hotspot Mode of the WLAN adapter will operate solely in the 5.0 Gigahertz (GHz) Frequency Band and hence only devices capable of operating in that Frequency Band will be capable of sharing the Internet connection of the device via Hotspot Mode.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanHotSpotBand

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 2.4GHz  0 
 5GHz  1 

Security Mode

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Hotspot Configuration

Select the Security Mode to be used to secure the Hotspot Mode of the WLAN adapter will operate on a device.

  • If the value Open is selected, the WLAN adapter will apply no security for Hotspot Mode, thus providing no control over which devices can connect and share the Internet connection of the device via Hotspot Mode.

  • If the value WPA2/PSK is selected, the WLAN adapter will apply Wi-Fi Protected Access Version 2 (WPA2) Pre-shared Key (PSK) security for Hotspot Mode, thus providing some control over which devices can connect and share the Internet connection of the device via Hotspot Mode. You must also specify Security Passphrase to provide the PSK passphrase that will be used to secure the network.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanHotSpotSecurityMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Open  0 
 WPA2/PSK  1 

Security Passphrase

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless LAN Configuration  >  Hotspot Configuration

Enter the PSK passphrase that will be used to secure the Hotspot Mode network implemented by the WLAN adapter on a device, when the value WPA2/PSK is selected for Security Mode.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wlanHotSpotSecurityPassphrase

  • Type = string

Wireless WAN Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure APNs, Data, Device Administrator Lock, Dual SIM Dual Standby, General, and eSIM Profiles.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wwanConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

APNs

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration

Use this Sub-array to configure one or more Access Point Name(s) that can be used to connect to WWAN data services.

Detail Information:

  • Key = apns

  • Type = bundle_array

APN

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  APNs

Use this Sub-group to configure Name, Make Default, Access Point, User Name, Password, Port, Proxy, MMS Port, MMS Proxy, Server, MMSC, Type, MCC, MNC, Authentication Type, MVNO Type, Protocol, Roaming Protocol, and MVNO Match Data.

Detail Information:

  • Key = apn

  • Type = bundle

Name

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  APNs  >  APN

Enter the name of an APN.

Detail Information:

  • Key = apnApnName

  • Type = string

Make Default

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  APNs  >  APN

Select whether an APN should be the default APN.

  • If the value Yes is selected, the APN being will be the default APN and will be preferred over other APNs when establishing a cellular data connection.

  • If the value No is selected, the APN will not be the default APN.

Detail Information:

  • Key = apnMakeDefault

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Yes  1 
 No  0 

Access Point

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  APNs  >  APN

Enter a value that uniquely identifies an APN on the network.

APN Identifiers are allocated by cellular carriers to identify the networks that can be reached via various APNs. When acquiring a cellular data plan from a carrier, an APN Identifier will be provided, typically along with other information that qualifies or controls access to the network it identifies.

Detail Information:

  • Key = apnCustomAccessPoint

  • Type = string

User Name

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  APNs  >  APN

Enter a user name that can be used to authenticate to an APN.

A network accessed via a given APN Identifier may or may not require authentication. If authentication is required, a user name is generally always required and a password MAY also be required.

Detail Information:

  • Key = apnUserName

  • Type = string

Password

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  APNs  >  APN

Enter a password that can be used to authenticate to an APN.

A network accessed via a given APN Identifier may or may not require authentication. If authentication is required, a user name is generally always required and a password MAY also be required.

Detail Information:

  • Key = apnCustomPassword

  • Type = string

Port

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  APNs  >  APN

Enter the port number of an HTTP proxy to use for all traffic over the network accessed via an APN.

If a Proxy is required, a Port is also generally always required.

Detail Information:

  • Key = CustomPort

  • Type = string

Proxy

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  APNs  >  APN

Enter the address or name of an HTTP proxy to use for all traffic over the network accessed via an APN.

  • If a Proxy is required, a Port is also generally always required.

Detail Information:

  • Key = apnCustomProxy

  • Type = string

MMS Port

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  APNs  >  APN

Enter the port number of an HTTP proxy to use ONLY for (Multimedia Messaging Service) MMS traffic over the network accessed via an APN.

  • If an MMS Proxy is required, an MMS Port is also generally always required.

Detail Information:

  • Key = apnCustomMmsPort

  • Type = string

MMS Proxy

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  APNs  >  APN

Enter the address or name of an HTTP proxy to use ONLY for (Multimedia Messaging Service) MMS traffic over the network accessed via an APN.

  • If an MMS Proxy is required, an MMS Port is also generally always required.

Detail Information:

  • Key = apnCustomMmsProxy

  • Type = string

Server

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  APNs  >  APN

Enter a WAP Gateway Server address that should be used for an APN.

WAP Gateways are rarely, if ever, used on or supported by modern cellular carrier networks.

Detail Information:

  • Key = apnCustomServer

  • Type = string

MMSC

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  APNs  >  APN

Enter the Multimedia Messaging Service Center (MMSC) address required to route MMS traffic over the network accessed via an APN.

Detail Information:

  • Key = apnCustomMmsc

  • Type = string

Type

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  APNs  >  APN

Enter the Type of APN.

The value to enter for Type should be obtained from the cellular carrier whose network is to be accessed via the APN.

Detail Information:

  • Key = apnCustomType

  • Type = string

MCC

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  APNs  >  APN

Enter the Mobile Country Code (MCC) of the APN.

The MCC generally match the SIM Card being used or the APN will not be usable.

Detail Information:

  • Key = apnCustomMcc

  • Type = string

MNC

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  APNs  >  APN

Enter the Mobile Network Code (MNC) of the APN.

The MNC generally match the SIM Card being used or the APN will not be usable.

Detail Information:

  • Key = apnCustomMnc

  • Type = string

Authentication Type

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  APNs  >  APN

Select the Type of Authentication to be used for APN.

  • If the value None is selected, No Authentication Protocol will be used to authenticate for the APN.

  • If the value PAP is selected, the Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) will be used to authenticate for the APN.

  • If the value CHAP is selected, the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) will be used to authenticate for the APN.

Detail Information:

  • Key = apnCustomAuthType

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 None  1 
 PAP  2 
 CHAP  3 

MVNO Type

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  APNs  >  APN

Enter the Mobile Virtual Network Operator (MVNO) Type to be used for APN .

  • If the value None is selected, No MVNO will be used to configured for the APN.

  • If the value SPN is selected, the MVNO will be specified via an SPN (Service Provider Name) value for the APN, which you must also specify via MVNO Match Data.

  • If the value IMSI is selected, the MVNO will be specified via an IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) value for the APN, which you must specify via MVNO Match Data.

  • If the value GID is selected, the MVNO will be specified via an GID (Group Identifier) value for the APN, which you must specify via MVNO Match Data.

  • If the value ICCID is selected, the MVNO will be specified via an GID (Integrated Circuit Card ID) value for the APN, which you must specify via MVNO Match Data.

Detail Information:

  • Key = apnCustomMvnoType

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 None  1 
 SPN  2 
 IMSI  3 
 GID  4 
 ICCID  5 

Protocol

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  APNs  >  APN

Select the Protocol for an APN.

  • If the value IPv4 is selected, IPv4 will be applied.

  • If the value IPv6 is selected, IPv6 will be applied.

  • If the value IPv4/IPv6 is selected, IPv4/IPv6 will be applied.

Detail Information:

  • Key = apnCustomProtocol

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 IPv4  1 
 IPv6  2 
 IPv4/IPv6  3 

Roaming Protocol

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  APNs  >  APN

Select the APN Roaming Protocol

  • If the value IPv4 is selected, IPv4 will be applied

  • If the value IPv6 is selected, IPv6 will be applied

  • If the value IPv4/IPv6 is selected, IPv4/IPv6 will be applied

Detail Information:

  • Key = apnCustomRoamingProtocol

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 IPv4  1 
 IPv6  2 
 IPv4/IPv6  3 

MVNO Match Data

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  APNs  >  APN

Enter the Mobile Virtual Network Operator (MVNO) Match Data to be used for an APN when a value other than None is selected for MVNO Type.

The exact value to be specified depends on the MVNO Type specified. Consult your MVNO carrier for information on the MVNO Type and MVNO Match Data value to be used.

Detail Information:

  • Key = apnCustomMvnoMatchData

  • Type = string

Data Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure State, Service Type, Background Data, Data Roaming, User Control of Background Data, Data Limit State, Data Limit State Custom Limit, User Control of Data Limit, and Data Warning Threshold.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dataConfig

  • Type = bundle

State

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Data Configuration

Select the Power State of the WWAN adapter.

  • If the value Off is selected, the power to the WWAN adapter will be turned OFF, preventing all communications via the WWAN adapter and reducing battery drain.

  • If the value On is selected, the power to the WWAN adapter will be turned ON, potentially allowing communications via the WWAN adapter and increasing battery drain.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wwanDataConfigState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 6.3.

Service Type

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Data Configuration

Select the service type to use on the WWAN adapter.

  • If the value Data Only is selected, the service type of Data Only will be used.

  • If the value Voice + Data is selected, the service type of Voice + Data will be used.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wwanDataConfigServiceType

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Data Only  2 
 Voice + Data  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 10.0.

Background Data

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Data Configuration

Select whether use of WWAN Background Data will be Allowed.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, use of WWAN Background Data will NOT be Allowed.

  • If the value Allow is selected, use of WWAN Background Data WILL be Allowed.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wwanDataConfigBackgroundData

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 4.3.

Data Roaming

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Data Configuration

Select whether use of WWAN Data Roaming will be Allowed.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, use of WWAN Data Roaming will NOT be Allowed.

  • If the value Allow is selected, use of WWAN Data Roaming WILL be Allowed.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wwanDataConfigDataRoaming

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 4.4.

User Control of Background Data

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Data Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to control whether WWAN data can be used in the background.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to control whether WWAN data can be used in the background.

  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to control whether WWAN data can be used in the background.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wwanDataConfigUserControlBackgroundData

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 4.4.

Data Limit State

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Data Configuration

Select whether a limit should be imposed on the amount of WWAN data used, such as to control telecom expenses.

  • If the value Enable and set default limit is selected, a default limit will be imposed on the amount of WWAN data that can be used.

  • If the value Enable and set custom limit is selected, a custom limit will be imposed on the amount of WWAN data that can be used and you must also specify Custom Limit to provide the desired custom limit.

  • If the value Disable is selected, no limit will be imposed on the amount of WWAN data that can be used.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wwanDataConfigLimitState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Enable and set default limit  1 
 Enable and set custom limit  2 
 Disable  3 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 6.3.

Data Limit State Custom Limit

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Data Configuration

Enter a custom limit that should be imposed on the amount of WWAN data used, such as to control telecom expenses, when the value Enable and set custom limit is selected for Data Limit State.

The custom limit should be an integer value specifying the maximum amount of WWAN data that can be used, in megabytes (MB).

Detail Information:

  • Key = wwanDataConfigCustomLimit

  • Type = integer

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 6.3.

User Control of Data Limit

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Data Configuration

Select whether the User will be Allowed to control limits on how much data can be communicated using the WWAN adapter.

  • If the value Disallow is selected, the User will NOT be Allowed to control limits on how much data can be communicated using the WWAN adapter.

  • If the value Allow is selected, the User WILL be Allowed to control limits on how much data can be communicated using the WWAN adapter.

Detail Information:

  • Key = wwanDataConfigUserControlDataLimit

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Disallow  2 
 Allow  1 

Support Information:

  • NOT supported on Device(s): TC20 and TC25.

  • Supported from: MX 6.3.

Data Warning Threshold

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Data Configuration

Enter a Threshold amount of WWAN data usage, where a Warning will be generated to the User if it is exceeded.

The threshold should be an integer value specifying the threshold amount of WWAN data, in megabytes (MB).

Detail Information:

  • Key = wwanDataConfigWarningThreshold

  • Type = integer

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 6.3.

Device Administrator Lock Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure State, Type, ICCID, Network List, Unlock Code, and Unlock Retry Count.

Detail Information:

  • Key = daLockConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • Supported from: MX 9.2.

State

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Device Administrator Lock Configuration

Select whether the WWAN adapter will be locked to a Device Administrator defined carrier.

  • If the value Unlocked is selected, the WWAN adapter will NOT be locked to a Device Administrator-defined carrier. If the WWAN adapter was previously locked to a carrier, then you must also specify Type to identify the type of prior Lock to be Unlocked and you must also specify Unlock Code to provide the same Unlock Code provided when the prior Lock was performed.

  • If the value Locked is selected, the WWAN adapter WILL be locked to a Device Administrator-defined carrier. You must specify Type, Unlock Code, Unlock Retry Count, and Network List to provide the detail information required to establish the Lock. You must also specify ICCID if the value ICCID Lock is selected for Type.

Detail Information:

  • Key = daLockConfigState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Locked  1 
 Unlocked  2 

Type

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Device Administrator Lock Configuration

Select the Lock Type to be used to Lock the WWAN adapter to a Device Administrator-defined carrier when Locked is specified for State.

  • If the value Network Lock is selected, the WWAN adapter will be Locked to one or more carrier networks and Network List must be specified to identify those networks.

  • If the value ICCID Lock is selected, the WWAN adapter will be Locked to a SIM Card, identified by an Integrated Circuit Card Identifier (ICCID) and ICCID must be specified to identify that ICCID.

Detail Information:

  • Key = daLockConfigType

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Network Lock  0 
 ICCID Lock  1 

ICCID

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Device Administrator Lock Configuration

Enter the Integrated Circuit Card Identifier (ICCID) that identifies the SIM Card to which the WWAN adapter will be Locked when Locked is specified for State and ICCID Lock is specified for Type.

Detail Information:

  • Key = daLockConfigIccid

  • Type = string

Network List

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Device Administrator Lock Configuration

Enter the Network List, as one or more MCC or MNC values, that identifies network(s) to which the WWAN adapter will be Locked when Locked is specified for State and Network Lock is specified for Type.

To provide multiple values, separate with commas (e.g. 1,310410,31012).

Detail Information:

  • Key = daLockConfigNetworkList

  • Type = string

Unlock Code

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Device Administrator Lock Configuration

Enter a string value for the Unlock Code.

  • When Locked is specified for State, an Unlock Code must be chosen, entered, and saved security, since it will be needed later to Unlock.
  • When Unlocked is specified for State, the Unlock Code previously specified when the Lock was done must be entered in order to successfully Unlock.

Detail Information:

  • Key = daLockConfigUnlockCode

  • Type = string

Unlock Retry Count

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Device Administrator Lock Configuration

Enter a integer value for the Unlock Retry Count when Locked is specified for State to configure the maximum number of unsuccessful Unlock attempts can be attempted before further attempts will be blocked.

Detail Information:

  • Key = daLockConfigUnlockRetryCount

  • Type = string

Dual SIM Dual Standby Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Subscription Mode, State, Automatic Subscription, and Manual Subscription.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dsdsConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Oreo and Android 10.

  • Supported on Device(s): L10, TC57, and TC77.

  • Supported from: MX 10.2.

Subscription Mode

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Dual SIM Dual Standby Configuration

Select how Subscription Selection should be performed when the value On is selected for State.

  • If the value Automatic is selected, Automatic Subscription Selection will be used. You can specify the preferred SIM, and hence the preferred Subscription, to use for Data Communications, Voice Calls, and Text Messages collectively, by specifying Preferred Data Subscription SIM. If you do not specify a preferred Subscription, the Subscription for the primary SIM will be used as the preferred Subsciption. The preferred Subscription will be used as the current Subscription when it is in an In Service condition. When the current Subscription is in a sustained Out of Service condition, an automatic switch to the Subscription for the other SIM will be performed if that Subscription is in an In Service condition. You must specify Out of Service Timeout to provide the duration that the current Subscription must remain in an Out of Service condition before automatic switching to the other Subscription can occur.

  • If the value Manual is selected, Manual Subscription Selection will be used. You can select the preferred SIM, and hence the preferred Subscription, to use for Data Communications, Voice Calls, and Text Messages independently, by specifying Preferred Data Subscription SIM, Preferred Voice Call Subscription SIM, and Preferred Text Message Subscription SIM, respectively. If you do not specify a preferred Subscription for any service, then the Subscription for the primary SIM will be used as the preferred Subscription.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dsdsSubscriptionMode

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Manual  2 
 Automatic  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Oreo and Android 10.

  • Supported on Device(s): L10, TC57, and TC77.

State

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Dual SIM Dual Standby Configuration

Select whether the WWAN adapter will handle multiple SIM Card(s) in Dual SIM Dual Standby (DSDS) Mode.

  • If the value Off is selected, the WWAN adapter will NOT handle multiple SIM Cards in Single SIM Mode, which means that ONLY the Subscription for the currently selected SIM will be available for use. To use a different Subscription, a different SIM must be explicitly selected by specifying SIM Card Slot.

  • If the value On is selected, the WWAN adapter WILL handle multiple SIM Cards in Dual SIM Dual Standby Mode, which means that two SIM Cards, if present, can be active at the same time. This can be beneficial if the Subscriptions for those SIMs have different performance, pricing, coverage, etc. The default behavior in Dual SIM Dual Standby Mode is for Incoming Voice Calls and Incoming Text Messages to be received using BOTH Subscriptions, Outgoing Voice Calls and Outgoing Text Messages to ask the User which Subscription to use, and Data Communications to use the Subscription for the primary SIM. You can also use the Sub-group Dual SIM Dual Standby Configuration to modify the default behavior of Dual SIM Dual Standby Mode.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dsdsState

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 Do not change   
 Off  2 
 On  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported on Device(s): L10, TC57, and TC77.

  • Supported from: MX 8.1.

Automatic Subscription Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Dual SIM Dual Standby Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Out of Service Timeout and Preferred Subscription SIM.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dsdsAutoConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Oreo and Android 10.

  • Supported on Device(s): L10, TC57, and TC77.

Out of Service Timeout

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Dual SIM Dual Standby Configuration  >  Automatic Subscription Configuration

Enter a Duration (in seconds) that the Subscription for the current SIM must remain in an Out of Service condition before automatic switching to the Subscription for the other SIM may occur, when the value On is selected for State and the value Automatic is selected for Subscription Mode.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dsdsAutoConfigOutOfServiceTimeout

  • Type = integer

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Oreo and Android 10.

  • Supported on Device(s): L10, TC57, and TC77.

Preferred Subscription SIM

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Dual SIM Dual Standby Configuration  >  Automatic Subscription Configuration

Select the SIM that identifies the Subscription to be used as the preferred Subscription, when the value On is selected for State and the value Automatic is selected for Subscription Mode.

The Subscription for the selected SIM will be the initial default Subscription to use and the preferred Subscription to use to if the Subscriptions for both SIMs are in an In Service condition.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dsdsAutoConfigPreferredSubscriptionSim

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 SIM 1  0 
 SIM 2  1 

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Oreo and Android 10.

  • Supported on Device(s): L10, TC57, and TC77.

Manual Subscription Configuration

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Dual SIM Dual Standby Configuration

Use this Sub-group to configure Preferred Data Subscription SIM, Preferred Voice Call Subscription SIM, and Preferred Text Message Subscription SIM.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dsdsManualConfig

  • Type = bundle

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Oreo and Android 10.

  • Supported on Device(s): L10, TC57, and TC77.

Preferred Data Subscription SIM

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Dual SIM Dual Standby Configuration  >  Manual Subscription Configuration

Select the SIM that identifies the Subscription to be used as the preferred Subscription for Data Communications, when the value On is selected for State and the value Manual is selected for Subscription Mode. If you do not specify a preferred Subscription, then the Subscription for the primary SIM will be used as the preferred Subscription.

Detail Information:

  • Key = dsdsManualConfigPreferredDataSubscriptionSim

  • Type = string

 UI Choice  JSON Value 
 SIM 1  1 
 SIM 2  2 

Support Information:

  • Supported on Operating System(s): Oreo and Android 10.

  • Supported on Device(s): L10, TC57, and TC77.

Preferred Voice Call Subscription SIM

   Wireless and Network Configuration  >  Wireless WAN Configuration  >  Dual SI